JP7142899B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a displacement member is configured to be displaceable (Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-116782 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the focus on the displacement member suitable. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of favorably drawing attention to a displacement member .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined mode of displacement, the first displacement member and the second displacement member In the game machine configured to be relatively displaced, the first displaceable member is displaceable in such a manner that the surface that can be visually recognized in a predetermined area viewed from a predetermined direction changes between a first surface and a second surface. wherein the displacement in the predetermined mode and the change in the visible surface are caused by a driving force from the same driving means, and the change in the visible surface is caused by the second displacement by the driving means The first displacement member is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the member , and in the game machine, the driving means is brought into a predetermined driving state, the second displacement member is displaced, and the first displacement member is displaced. and when the visible surface is changed, the visible surface is maintained when the predetermined driving state is continued after the visible surface is changed, and A period during which the predetermined driving state is continued may be the first period, and a period during which the predetermined driving state is continued may be the second period, which is shorter than the first period .

According to the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to make the attention to the first displacement member suitable.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate, the variable winning device, the collecting gutter and the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each jackpot classification, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of a sorting device. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit; It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; It is a front view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. FIG. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40; FIG. 11 is a front view of the first action unit in an intermediate effect state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first action unit in an intermediate rendering state; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotational member; 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing changes in angles accompanying rotation of a rotating member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a); FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. 4 is a timing chart showing, in chronological order, an example of an arrangement of an elevating arm member, a drive mode of a drive motor, and an output of a detection sensor; FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28; (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that has been cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a large number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). ) and windmills (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws or the like are installed from the front side of the game board 13. is fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In the high-probability state (during variable probability) in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit increases during a predetermined number of variations (100 variations in this embodiment), and the probability of a second symbol to be described later increases. It includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加"Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends varies by 100 During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a time saving state for 100 variations.

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. and a long time is set. When the electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 140 more than when the electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and when it hits once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the rear case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window of the base plate 60. is set. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart in the front-rear direction. It is

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 140a of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is opened. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (Fig. 11 ) is connected to a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631 , 731 , 782 , 861 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 6(a) shows a closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning hole 65a. An open state of the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6 .

The variable winning device 65 accepts a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6(b)), and opens the opening/closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. , the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left-right central part of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left-right central portion, but mainly occurs in the left-right outer portion of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the placement of the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, the placement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) covering the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward toward the rear side from the lower end of the front end portion disposed opposite to ). It is possible to reduce the degree to which momentum is lost due to collision. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be arranged near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower portion of the front design member 141 may be arranged in either the front or rear direction. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is arranged downward on the front side, so that a larger space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the width of the front design member 141 becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow bottom surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. Guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the left-right outside of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending forward and inward in the left and right direction from the rear wall portion and the inner left and right wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is displaced rearward toward the inner left and right sides. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b contacts the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be moved downward along the inclined surface. It can be guided to 163a1 with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b cannot be performed even if the ball is arranged outside the inclined flow surface 163a1 to the left and right. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball swept backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b rebounds from the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening/closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed by a rising motion. That is, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not shift to the left/right position, and the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The ball on it is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged on the left and right outer sides or if the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 and the guide plate portion 163a2 are devised, the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, it is possible to keep the quickness of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed flat (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows leftward and rightward due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls are temporarily moved backward in parallel, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to have a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling balls flow in the left/right direction, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will move irregularly, it is possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surface portions 163a3 that abut on the tip portions of the rotation at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. there is The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right contact surfaces, and are formed so as to allow surface contact rather than point contact due to a shape design that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b. In addition, since stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact, the durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 so as to be substantially parallel to the open/close plate 65b, which is arranged opposite to the contact surface portion 163a3, with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in the event that contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, the member to be fixed 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is arranged on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and is basically configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state cannot be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 are displaced. , so as to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. As a result, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts with the opening/closing plate 65b from the normal shape, so there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball in the process of being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be received in a state of being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in a state in the middle of being received (for example, in a state of being sandwiched between the turning tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize winning port 65a and sliding sideways), the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided by the curved shape. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming part 336, so that the visibility to the third flow path forming part 336 can be easily secured. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is positioned outside the electric accessory 140a. is limited to

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to limit the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific prize winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to ensure the field of view at the left and right inner positions of the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a below the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the base plate 60 and behind the variable prize winning device 65, there are a first prize winning port 64, a second prize winning port 140, and a ball entered into the general prize winning port 63 (see FIG. 2). A collecting gutter 150 is provided in which a path is formed for flowing the ball discharge passage (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the groove-shaped portion has an open front side facing the base plate 60 . By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning hole 64, and a second flow path part 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning hole 140. and a plurality of third flow passages 153 forming flow passages for the balls entered into the general winning holes 63 arranged on both left and right sides.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the left from the rear position of the first prize winning port 64, and the second flow channel portion 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the right from the rear position of the second prize winning port 140. It is configured as a flow path for The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending downward from the general winning opening 63 .

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, but the flow of the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 is , and gathered to the left and right outside from the central position in the left and right by the collecting gutter 150 . Thereby, a space can be provided below the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140, and the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, which will be described later, can be arranged using this space.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable prize winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. is an exploded rear perspective view of the . 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, the other portions are omitted, and the other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. 9, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60 for convenience of explanation.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 fastened and fixed to the variable prize winning device 65 at the upper portion, and an insertion hole 331 fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collecting gutter 150, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are when the sorting device 300 is provided and when the sorting device 300 is not provided. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be shared.

Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific prize winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a downflow path along which the balls received by the variable prize winning device 65 flow. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes based on the detection result of the ball flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13, and a fixed member 161 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to 161, and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and capable of receiving a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connection part with the sorting device 300; and a state switching device 165 which is fastened and fixed to the opening and closing plate 65b and configured to be capable of switching the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The member to be fixed 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the shape of its front side is flat except for the through hole for inserting the screw, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the rear side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 in the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through-hole having a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be disposed is formed through the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted through the through hole of the base plate 60 .

Inside the boundary portion 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extending support plates 161b each having a substantially T-shape and having a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the unit has a function as a portion for supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical projecting part 161f projecting in a left-right symmetrical shape below the left-right central position of the specific winning hole 65a contacts the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 and guides the ball down. have a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of to-be-fastened portions 161h having female thread portions for screwing fastening screws inserted through the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

A fastened portion 161i having a female threaded portion for screwing a fastening screw to be inserted through the interposed member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left-right central position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through-holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion between the through-hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through-hole for inserting the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the to-be-fastened portion 161i is arranged.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The sphere can flow down in the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161 .

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female threaded portions which are disposed at positions matching the through holes 161g of the member to be fixed 161 and into which fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161g can be screwed. It has a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extended portions 162b and 162c that are shaped to cover the fastened portion 162a from above and extend toward the rear side.

The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby increasing the durability of the fastened portion 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extended portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the flow-down path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball on the part 162b from flowing toward the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two points at both the left and right ends) extending on both the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inner sides, the ball flowing on the extension portions 162c is formed. The flow-down route can be summarized as the flow-down route of the ball on the extended portion 162b. As a result, compared to the number of falling balls, the range in which the falling balls are arranged can be narrowed (the density of ball placement can be increased), and the visibility is not hindered by the balls (the flowing path is non-configured space) can be reserved.

Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is illustrated in a plain color and the visibility on the back side is good, it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by sticking a sticker with an illustrated pattern or character, or a groove may be cut in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and the groove may be irradiated with light. A geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Alternatively, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-permeable after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, a ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position matching the fastened portion 161h of the member 161 to be fixed. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screws inserted through the intervening member 164 are screwed, which is located in the center of the left and right. A pair of fastened portions 163d arranged on the side and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted through the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that slopes down toward the left-right outer side with the left-right center portion as the apex, and the inclined flow slopes downward toward the rear at a position that is one step lower than the left-right outer end portions of the left-right inclined surface. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, and a fastened portion of the receiving member 163 formed through the upper portion of the body portion 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light-emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and having LEDs disposed thereon, and both left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of to-be-fastened portions 164d formed having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a to-be-fastened member 161 that is formed through the upper part of the main body portion 164a and is to be fastened. and an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light-emitting substrate 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LEDs are arranged facing obliquely forward and upward. It is arranged just below the mouth 140 . Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes obliquely backward and downward.

Therefore, when a ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the LED of the light emitting board 164c is controlled to light up, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to make the player easily grasp whether or not has occurred.

Due to the configuration described above, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 . As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed compared to the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 Relative positional deviation can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with an open top, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger tip of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c engaged with the plunger. A slide portion 165d that is slidably displaced is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the front end portion of the rotation protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b, and a rotation portion that rotates as the slide portion 165d is slid is displaced. It includes a moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165g fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws inserted through the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged therewith. engaged. The transmission projection 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 164d of the interposed member 164 can be inserted. , an intermediate member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 which are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and are formed so as to allow the fastening screws to be screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 to pass therethrough; A substrate 350, which is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and on which a light emitting means 351 such as an LED is arranged on the front side, and a substrate 350 which is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, depends on the presence or absence of energization. and a slide displacement member 370 arranged below the middle member 330 and slidably displaced back and forth between the front side position and the rear side position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched, An insertion hole that is disposed below the intermediate member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the intermediate member 330 and is formed so as to allow the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 to be inserted. a lower member 380 having 381;

Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow-down path along which the ball that has passed through the ball-passing hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the passage forming portions 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge passage (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is configured to be visually recognized by the player, and the flow-down mode provides the player with not only a mere presentation effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also the player. There is an effect related to the game profit such as causing a change in the profit.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the position of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to gather at the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It is devised assuming the concentration of

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed through the ball so as to receive the ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent sealing members 313 attached as a pair of transparent sealing members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and an intermediate member a plurality of insertion cylindrical portions 315 formed with through-holes through which fastening screws threaded into the intermediate member 330 can be inserted; fastened portions 316 having female threads into which fastening screws threaded through the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of long front-to-rear projections 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions projected downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are arranged between a pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 A pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front-rear long projecting portions 317, and a size that allows the upper portion of the substrate 350 to be arranged. a receiving recess 320 formed as a recess in the

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball-passing hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows it downward. 12) is cut along an inclined plane so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. As a result, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b is guided to the opening 312. FIG.

The seal member 313 receives light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and is visually recognized brilliantly, thereby functioning as a member that attracts the player's attention, the details of which will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow-down path of the ball below the upper member 310 . A first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface portion is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. Further, the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right intervals become longer toward the near side, so that the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b can be ensured.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface thereof for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from the upper side.

The insertion tubular portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches a fastened portion 332 d having a female screw portion formed on the intermediate member 330 . In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged in such a manner that the screw portion faces upward and the screw head faces downward. Therefore, while the fastening part 316 is arranged on the near side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who views it obliquely from above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from deteriorating due to the fastening screws while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed.

The reason why the to-be-fastened part 316 is formed only on the right side is that since two insertion cylinder parts 315 are already arranged on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that, although it is not conspicuous because it is laid out, the sorting device 300 looks better if it is omitted if it is not necessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair of left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set so as to avoid the falling path of the balls and to minimize the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300, which will be described later in detail.

The lower surfaces of the front-rear elongated protruding portions 317, the left-right inner protruding portions 318, and the left-right outer protruding portions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved such that the arrangement is lowered with increasing distance from the same location. formed as a plane. The curved surface has different shapes for the front-rear projection 317, the left-right inner projection 318, and the left-right outer projection 319, and the difference in shape is intended to control the flow of the ball.

The intermediate member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and forming a flow-down path of the ball, and the first A pair of second flow passage forming portions 335 which are connected to the front end portion of the flow passage forming portion 334 to form a flow-down path of the sphere and are recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333, and the second flow pass forming portions. A pair of third flow passage forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow-down path of the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333 .

In addition, the intermediate member 330 has a left-right elongated shape on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed through the lower bottom and functions as a ball discharge passage. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a plate shape elongated in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 into left and right, and a left and right long rectangular plate portion 338 extending from the lower surface of the rear end portion of the third flow pass forming portion 336 to the left and right. and a pair of alignment projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

The rear frame-shaped part 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front part which forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a part that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360 . The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has a placement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left-right center portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed therein, and a through hole elongated in the left-right direction. A guide hole 332b is formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. A fastening part 332c and a columnar fastening part 332d having a female threaded portion at the upper end into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed are provided.

The front side frame-shaped part 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower base, so that visibility on the back side of the front side frame-shaped part 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape when viewed from above, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a spot facing hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Prepare.

The first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 are parts that constitute the flow-down path of the sphere, and are arranged so that the flow-down direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, etc. are different. designed, but more on that later.

An open portion 335a, which is opened on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336, allows the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged to enter the inside of the flow channel through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300. As shown in FIG.

The ejection holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are formed in a pair of right and left holes, and are formed in a size that allows balls to be ejected through at least two paths. That is, it is configured with a lateral length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1. It is sufficient to design the shape of

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, the details of which will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is fitted with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding the positional deviation between the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380, which will be described later in detail.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352 , and a recess for alignment is provided in the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353 . A portion 354 is provided.

The concave portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with a portion corresponding to the internal shape of the intermediate member 330 , and the elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction. Positioning in the front-rear direction is performed by being supported so as to be sandwiched between the upper member 310, and the upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, thereby preventing the upper part 352 from falling off upward and fixing the arrangement. The details will be described later along with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 .

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip end of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the horizontal direction. and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and that rotates as the sliding portion 362 slides. , provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes rightward from the right side, and a lower side. and a guided portion 362c protruding downward from the front-rear central portion of the guide portion 362c and formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the intermediate member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted through the guide hole 332b of the intermediate member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the horizontal direction. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is elongated in the horizontal direction, it is possible to maintain the posture of the sliding portion 362 by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the top, and is formed in a cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction at the L-shaped connecting portion, and has a through hole of a size that allows the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted thereinto. A support cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from the tip of the L-shaped short side and inserted into a through-hole of the projecting portion 362b, and a long side of the L-shaped portion. A lower columnar portion 363c projecting downward from the side tip portion in a columnar shape and inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370 is provided.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 . That is, when the plunger is slid and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the projecting portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction between the upper and lower positions of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380. A thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below by 380, a pair of left and right upper projecting portions 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376. and a recessed portion 378 which is recessed at the projecting end portion of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 .

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a penetrating through the rear half portion, and the front side end portion of the left and right central portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is elongated in the front-rear direction with a width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper projecting portion 376. A recessed portion 372 that is recessed, a pair of lower protruded streaks 373 protruding downward in the shape of a protruding line along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and projections along the left and right edges of the rear half portion. A plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both vertical and vertical directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end portion in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are assumed to face and slide on the intermediate member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380 . Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a substantially trapezoidal columnar portion when viewed from the front, and is arranged so as to pass through the placement through hole 332 a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 . The width of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 . With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 .

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap on the left and right inner sides, and is configured to be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction by coming into contact with the partition plate portion 338 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be properly guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as an elongated hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to generate the front-rear displacement of the slide displacement member 370. be.

The protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, thereby forming a lower cylindrical portion of the rotating portion 363. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378. As shown in FIG.

Thus, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a is a shape that includes the entire range in which the upper protruding portion 376 to be inserted and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are opened, and other portions are closed. formed in

The plate-like portion 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1 in the same way as the sensor-holding frame portion 389 has through-holes in the vertical direction. A ridge portion 383 projecting upward in the shape of an elongated ridge in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of projections projecting from the front end portion of the ridge portion 383 to the left and right. A set portion 383a, a pair of guide protrusions 384 protruding at a position behind the protrusion 383 so as to be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide protrusions 384. A pair of guide ridges 385 formed as long ridges in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right outer sides of the guide ridges, and a long hole-shaped guide long hole 386 extending on the same straight line as the ridge portion 383 in a top view. , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 332c of the intermediate member 330 can be inserted therethrough. .

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a lateral thickness slightly shorter than the lateral gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370. placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The projecting portion 383 a is designed so that the left and right inner end portions thereof are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portion 339 of the intermediate member 330 . That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted to the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the middle member 330 is aligned with the lower member 380 as a reference. Directions can be positioned appropriately. At the same time, the rear side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion that connects the protrusion 383 and the projecting portion 383a on the front end side) is brought into contact with the front side surface of the alignment projecting portion 339, thereby The position of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction with reference to the member 380 can be determined appropriately.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation between the third flow path forming portion 336 as a structure of the intermediate member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380 .

The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right long oval shape, is inserted through the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370 , and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range where the guide projecting portion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from colliding with the ridge portion 383, so that, for example, the end of displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge portion 383. Compared to the configuration, the durability of the protrusion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protrusion 383 can be maintained for a long time.

Even if the guide projecting portion 384 is damaged, it does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 , but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting portion 383 . For this reason, normally, the design is made with a strength that can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projecting portion 384 and the projecting portion 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the sliding displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the strength of the projecting portion 383 may be used for the rest of the period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide projection 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the horizontal width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridges 385 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a lateral width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide elongated hole 386 .

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of the sphere that flows below the middle member 330 . In this embodiment, the flow of the ball entering the out hole 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 388 with the screw head directed downward. As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous visibility of the fastening screw. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outside and on the rear side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 blocks the view of the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 or near the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, and the concave portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the projection 383 , the guide elongated hole 386 for the cylindrical projection 375 , the partition plate 338 for the upper projection 376 , and the like, and is displaced in the front-rear direction. As a result, since the load during guidance can be distributed to a plurality of positions, it is possible to avoid the load from being applied locally, and to avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370 . can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by a plurality of members including at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 . That is, the slide displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper projecting portions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 and a recessed portion 372 guided by the projecting portion 383 of the lower member 380 .

Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 are portions that continuously form a flow-down path of the sphere, and it is preferable to keep the displacement small. It is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will not be performed satisfactorily. , the relative placement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective and an error notification may be performed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in an unsatisfactory state.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. In addition, here, the configuration related to the flow of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration of entering the flow-down path side of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330 . The first flow path forming part 334, the following second flow path forming part 335, and the following third flow path forming part 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and are connected to each other. is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow passage forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined flow passage that rotates 90 degrees and allows the ball to flow down in the left and right direction. It is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape with a right angle of curvature, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow-down speed of the spheres increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the flow direction in the following second flow path forming part 335 does not have a longitudinal component, so the first flow path It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow passage forming portion 336 following the second flow passage forming portion 335, the flow is directed rearward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow pass forming portion 334, so the acceleration in the front-rear direction is received. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode with reduced influence.

Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow speed of the ball on the downstream side, unlike the flow down mode in which the ball flows down in the same direction (for example, leftward) all the time. In other words, the flow speed of the ball can be made uniform throughout the flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be maintained at a high level, and the situation in which the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming part 335, but forming the second flow path forming part 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging of balls and reverse flow. When the second flow path forming part 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming part 335 is 0), that is, when the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 are When the spheres are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the ball from the front side flow to the rear flow by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the ball's flow direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth. may occur.

On the other hand, if the switching angle of the flow direction is 90 degrees or less as in this embodiment (90 degrees in this embodiment), the speed direction of the ball does not reverse, so the ball flows smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the spheres.

The shape of the flow path at the connecting ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical projecting part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in such a manner as to bend the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed such that the portion located downstream of the sphere is more receded from the path of the sphere than the portion located upstream of the sphere. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged to face is formed longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portion 338 arranged adjacent to it. Further, the rear end portions of the left and right ends of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged to face each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow channel side surfaces of the second flow channel forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

As a result, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from backflowing.

At the connection end between the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the first flow passage forming portion 334, the side wall portions 334a curved at the front left and right ends of the intermediate member 330 bend the flowing direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that lowers toward the front side protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. A curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow-down direction of the ball.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved projection 334b, flows down the first flow passage forming portion 334, and contacts the side wall portion 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the flow direction to the second flow path. Flowing down the flow path forming part 335 , the flowing direction is switched by contacting the symmetrical projecting part 161 f while flowing, flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 , and reaching the discharge hole 337 .

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the projecting support portion 161d of the member 161 to be fixed. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and positional deviation in the left-right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the left-right direction. It can be performed.

The longitudinal inclination angles and length ratios of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. With respect to the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The flow passage forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and is set to a slightly loose common inclination angle in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. FIG.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square outer shape when viewed from above, which is the inner side surface, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed to have a large square with outer sides. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square is 45 mm. It is formed.

For this reason, the total clearance between both sides of the sphere is set to 1 mm for the commonly used sphere with a diameter of 11 mm. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined to be about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the misalignment of the falling ball can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Among the portions constituting the ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 arranged in a square surrounding the square front frame portion 333, the upstream end portion of the first flow path forming portion 334 is Since only the curved protrusions 334b that constitute the components are arranged inside (on the front side) the apexes of the square, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed into the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. short in comparison.

In terms of actual measurement values in top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm between the centers of the spheres), and the length is It is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between the centers of the spheres).

It can be explained from the ratio of the longitudinal direction inclination angle and length of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 with the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path formation part 335 with a looser inclination angle and 1.5 times the path length. and shorter than the time to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement shifts to the rear side, and a part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-transmissive resin portion. The ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage from the state in which the visibility of the ball is poor in , and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, in a state where the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball (movement of the eyeball) is reduced. eye fatigue) can be reduced.

When focusing on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 with high visibility in this way, the ball flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case in which the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow passage forming portion 336, the amount of displacement of the ball in the front view is smaller, so the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , can be minimized when focusing on the sphere flowing down the third channel forming portion 336 .

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere when viewed from the front is different. The sphere flowing down is slower than the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 .

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and it is easy to draw attention to the ball. is common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, it is possible to effectively reduce the game burden of the player who concentrates the line of sight in this way.

In addition, in order to secure the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336, an opening portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow passage forming portion 335 in this embodiment. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid obstruction of the line of sight toward the third flow passage forming portion 336 by the meat portion of the second flow passage forming portion 335 .

Furthermore, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only in a portion necessary for abutting and guiding the falling ball, and the formation of shaped portions on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed as a vertically thin plate-like portion, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, the possibility that the line of sight directed to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is reduced. It can be made low and the visibility can be improved.

In addition, it is configured such that the spheres deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and directed toward the out port 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, a ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming portion 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming portion 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the inner side of the third flow passage forming portion 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are covered in the front and rear sides, so that the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is observed. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow passage forming part 336 or the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a but enters the out port 71, the ball enters the field of view focusing on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the structure of the nail implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), most of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, 64, 140 (balls other than the balls that have entered the ball) gather and the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (the portion where the player's attention is focused) is arranged at the position covered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the falling ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is It is configured to lower the

For example, the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 is formed with a light diffusing processed surface 333b having a prism-like shape for producing light diffusing action. In FIG. 17, the saw-toothed portion is the light diffusion processing surface 333b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner circumference of the inner surface and over the top and bottom.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, and the entire surface is visible as if it is shining. and the visibility on the far side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, the visibility is poor when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when the light is not emitted, the visibility is at least lower than that when light is emitted. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the shielding object, the shadow of the shielding object will be visually recognized as a black dot, making it easier to determine its position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side surface of the left and right outer protrusions 319, and a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side surface of the frame front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

The processed surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 and is attached to the front side frame-like portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the lid portion, and a light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is provided on the back side, the bottom side, the inner side of the vortex, and the upper side of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, respectively. A processed surface is formed to achieve the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes focused on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front side frame-shaped part 333 to make it difficult to see immediately.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight, who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 obliquely from above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it becomes difficult to identify the sphere after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen by irradiating the light diffusion processed surface 340 with light. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in order to grasp how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. , the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be further improved.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily visible as a black dot can be configured. In this manner, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, the visibility of the sphere can be switched between good and bad. In addition, depending on whether or not the sphere is placed on the front side of the black point, it is possible to construct a situation in which the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black point is visible without being hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

As a result, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be prevented from being scraped by contact with the spheres, so the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. can be used, and the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Furthermore, by contacting the light diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 with the spheres, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being hindered from flowing down or being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. can be avoided.

It should be noted that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the channel side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to produce the effect of diffusing the light and the effect of decelerating the sphere by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastening portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and high visibility is maintained without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screws.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is made of metal and is non-permeable, it is possible to hide the portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that the light is diffused. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The purpose of this is to make the substrate 350 disposed on the back side in addition to shining brilliantly. and function as a blindfold for the state switching device 360 . In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 serves as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is accommodated in a manner supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, but is arranged with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 in the left-right central portion, and slides into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position sandwiching the slide displacement member 370 with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16). A slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the housing recess 320 of the upper member 310 and faces the light diffusion processing surface 164f formed on the interposed member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a brilliant effect. The visibility of the range of can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged in the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's eye level, it is possible to make it appear as if the specific winning hole 65a is illuminated above and below.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is arranged at the left-right center side position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 hinders the field of view and is good. Therefore, sufficient effects can be obtained as long as they are formed in at least the arrangement gap between the pair of detection sensors SE1.

The lower side portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the light toward the seal member 313 and the portion disposed therebelow where the ball flows down, the details of which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow-down path of the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. 19 and 20, FIG. 15 to FIG. 18 will be referred to as needed.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a diagram. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged bilaterally symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 having a common function. The variable probability detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is an entering ball sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection of one ball) are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but a detection sensor that changes the game state after the jackpot game ends by detecting the entering ball. Function.

In addition, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next big win is to be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the channel side concave, the flowing ball can smoothly flow toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts backward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Ball passage is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 during the big winning game, the game state after the big winning game is controlled to be the variable probability state. In other words, when the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots, variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots are provided as described above. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 in the case of a variable probability big hit, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the ball moves. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that it is difficult to pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the details of the control will be described later.

Thus, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly related to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, more than a few fraudulent acts of illegally switching the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 have been discovered, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by displacing the portion inserted into the installation portion 378 toward the rear side. This is the normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent act inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball delivery opening, the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), etc. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 toward the back side, there is a possibility of illegally creating a state in which the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11. be.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18). When the thin metal wire is passed through the path forming portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370 , it is difficult to press against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 , and the upper projecting portion 376 is pressed against it. As described above, the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that relieves the load to the left and right outer sides, so even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be relieved to the left and right outer sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition to the fact that the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 is not straight but spirally wound, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged farther from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side. Since it is separated (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 . That is, conventionally, in many cases, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force against the fraudulent act as described above. , the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. degree can be increased.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire that is laid through the third flow path forming part 336, the thin metal wire itself may cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming part 336. , it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly. should be avoided.

In the conventional model, it was normal to configure so as to regulate the entry to the normal detection sensor SE12 in the state where the entry to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is allowed, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12. It is a configuration that allows

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the variable probability state after the big winning game is ensured. Based on this idea, in the present embodiment, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. In addition, as a result of arranging no movable member, there is no need for maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member, and the pachinko machine can be used longer than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed projections 317, 318, 319 and shape have been devised. That is, a portion fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, a protrusion) prevents a larger ball than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position. This is achieved by the shape of the installation portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, the contrivance of the shape of the flow path will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side) in the lateral direction. (See FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path forming part 335 in terms of angle and direction. It is possible to reduce bounce of the ball when the ball flows in (bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear side position. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path forming portion 335. Since the direction of inclination is the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the velocity in the left-right direction is generated in the left-right inward direction. This also reduces the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, arrangement and configuration of the fixed projecting portions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner projecting portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path configuring portion 336 are first placed close to each other. The left and right inward projecting portion 318 is the smallest projecting portion among the projecting portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side, it contacts the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 without omission while sliding on the partition plate portion 338 .

Projecting tip surfaces of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is more horizontal than the front end side of the projecting portion. It is formed so that it spreads outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and coming into contact with the left and right inner projecting portion 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward component and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are formed to be small, the load received from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or in the left or right outward direction. function as attachments. Since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370 , the above-described biasing force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner projections 318 will be described separately for each case. When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper projecting portion 376 and the front-rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding ends of the front-to-rear protruding portion 317 have similar uses as the upper protruding portion 376 . That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is made substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376 . As a guideline, the upper projecting portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in top view (see FIG. 17), while The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface starting from the ceiling surface of the flow path and ending at a position close to the terminal position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction view. (See FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outer sides, and the ball that is urged to the left and right outer sides by contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left-right direction, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outward projecting portions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the bouncing of the ball, it is possible to smoothly form the downward flow of the ball. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the ball flowing direction but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is greatly different from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and the protruding end is a variable detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature extending from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer projecting portions 319 are arranged on the front side from the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer projecting portions 319 When the provided portion 319 abuts on the sphere in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer projecting portions 319 . Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball does not flow backward to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted further rearward than the longitudinally elongated projecting portion 317 . flows in contact with

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a projecting end portion (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 Since the center of thickness is arranged just behind the position, it is easy to apply a load with a suppressed component in the left-right direction to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely forward and downward because the projecting tip of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner projections 318 receives the load from the front-rear long projections 317 and flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

Here, depending on where the ball collides with the front-rear projecting portion 317, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound toward the front side (reverse flow may occur). Since the contact with the setting portion 318 forces the ball to the left, right, and diagonally downward, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not reach the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the , the rear side surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 (see FIG. 19), and the back flow in the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily avoided.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position and the ball flows to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. In the same way as in the case above, the sphere is displaced from the right and left inner projecting portions 318 to the left and right outer sides due to the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. When 370 makes a closing motion (moving from the rearward position to the forward position), it may apply a forward load to the sphere, and the load in the direction (forward) that causes the sphere to flow back through the third flow path forming portion 336 is applied. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 . For example, if the ball is controlled to complete the closing operation before it reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, so the ball may flow backward. can be lessened.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without omission. It is possible to produce an action of guiding the ball reaching the rear end portion of the flow passage forming portion 336 to the left and right outer sides. This makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Also, the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not an operation in a direction facing the ball, but an operation in a direction away from the ball. Even if the movement is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, the load that pushes the ball back toward the front side is less likely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that even if the opening operation is performed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, the backflow of the balls will not easily occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before it flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation of the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (in the direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped, making it easier to shift to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the force of the previous rolling. , the ball can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment equipped with the sorting device 300 described above, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be described. In the following, as an example, different cases will be described in which the angles of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction are different.

21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a game is played by keeping one's head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a direction that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, a game may be played by bringing the player's head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice details, while the latter narrows the field of view, but makes it easier to notice details in that field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be mainly given while comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 21 to 23 show the opening state of the opening/closing plate 65b for the sake of convenience.

FIG. 21 shows the light emitting means 351 in phantom lines. Although the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top is as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half arranged in the lower part 353 will be explained here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. As a result, the player's attention to the sealing member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is arranged right above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be noticed.

In addition, formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually stretched vertically by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the sealing member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Although the light emission control is not limited in any way, for example, during a jackpot game, control is performed to irradiate the seal member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 arranged therebelow.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions right above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is normally detected by the detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball is entered, the player can be notified of the passing point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right central side are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed over the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (as a vertically extending strip of light visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrower than when viewed in the direction of FIG. As a result, the degree of difficulty in confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 increases. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the placement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient for the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass therethrough, the inside of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 It is possible to hide the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the position so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize winning port 65a during the round game, and flow down the respective flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, there is a possibility that the line of sight directed to the sphere on the back side is obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow passage forming portion 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the front side hides the ball on the back side.

Also, when the ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right outward direction. Since the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333 after it is detached from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction, the movement of the ball in the process of detaching from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction Flows from the downstream end position (the position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly displaced in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336), the sphere hides the sphere that is in the process of moving off the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether or not the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. This can be done by visual inspection, and it suffices to pay attention to the inner side of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path forming part 336 and the second flow path forming part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and the right side of the third flow path forming part 336 It is configured so that the sphere can flow down a path that includes the edge periphery (moving from the position of sphere P1 to the position of sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, there may occur a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12.

23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow passage forming portion 335 are clearly separated in the vertical arrangement. It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball of the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path that is visible at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized from the direction is reduced.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, as described above, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, after once flowing downward to the right, toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 The flow route is switched between the flow route and the flow route toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, compared to the case where the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, such as the case where the flow path of the sphere is switched depending on whether it flows directly downward or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner projecting portion 318 is not formed and the ball toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path It is positioned behind the center line of the component 336 .

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow passage forming portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves downward from the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is formed on the third flow route forming portion 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the sphere, the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 by displacing the sphere to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and is visible to the player's eyes is reduced, it is difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of direction views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as direction views for identifying the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, , both have advantages and disadvantages. As a result, the player is allowed to adjust and select his/her favorite visual recognition method instead of requesting the player to play a one-sided game even with respect to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300, thereby providing a wide range of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

The field of view of the player can be secured by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion of 336 can be removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized visually.

Regarding the directional views of FIGS. 22 and 23 , the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, the thickness of the member allows the light to pass through. Visibility is obstructed due to less light coming through.

Since the range where the field of vision is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, it is possible that the spheres flowing down inside the sorting device 300 can be more easily visually recognized when viewed in the direction of FIG. 23 compared to when viewed in the direction of FIG. have a nature.

The member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that light is less likely to be refracted (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it can be avoided that the visibility of the sorting device 300 is deteriorated.

Even the portions that cannot be made flat from a functional point of view are formed so as to have little effect on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are arranged so that the player looking at the passage forming portions 334 to 336 does not block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downward. outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outside, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 , the ball that deviates from the specific prize winning opening 65 a flows down toward the out opening 71 . The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be described.

FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the out port 71 with the opening/closing plate 65b opened. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that has flowed down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes a ball that deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portions 162 b and 162 c and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the out port 71 .

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 are arranged below the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid the deterioration of the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336 .

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61, like the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335, flows at a moderate angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same way as the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, the player's line of sight is guided to the left-right central position of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and to the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, since the lateral direction positions of the out port 71 and the third flow channel forming portion 336 are the same (right and left central position), the player can move his/her line of sight up and down to see the out port 71 and the third flow channel. The line of sight is guided to a state in which both of the constituent parts 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, the ball launched toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning hole 65a (whether the number of waste balls during the jackpot game is small), 162c, irrespective of whether or not the balls flowing down frequently occur (whether or not wasteful balls occur frequently during the jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming part 336 by the flowing balls. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third channel forming part 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. , the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow passage forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61 .

Normally, the ball heading for the out port 71 is a useless ball and does not have any effect in the game. to the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In addition, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming portion 335, so that the field of view of the second flow passage forming portion 335 can be lowered. have a nature.

On the other hand, the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a, and the third flow passage forming part 336 is arranged below the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the periphery of the rear end thereof is lowered due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be ensured by the length of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. We are trying to avoid increasing the space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the arrangement interval between the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guideline for the arrangement of the third flow passage forming part 336 from the player's line of sight. form a short

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the lower rear side of the specific winning hole 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so close to the outer shape of the specific prize winning opening 65a that it bites into it.

In addition, the ball enters the specific winning port 65a which is elongated in the left and right direction, and the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at the left and right ends of the specific prize winning port 65a has a symmetrical flow path. Via the parts 334 to 336, they are gathered below the left and right central sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened as compared with the case where the ball flows down the width of the specific winning opening 65a in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the structure required for the flow-down path of the ball can be a structure in which the lateral length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61 . can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning hole 65a close to the out hole 71, but the structure is not such that the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, but the second By adopting a structure in which the ball flows backward from the left and right inner end portions of the flow path forming portion 335 by the third flow path forming portion 336, the out port 71 (the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) is arranged. opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific prize winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's line of sight, in the design of the game area where the size in the front view is restricted to a certain standard, the specific Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning port 65a can be arranged near the bottom end of the game area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow down of the ball after hitting the sorting device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessories (the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow down will be described.

First, as a premise, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow passage forming portion 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow pass. It is configured to take 0.3 seconds to pass through configuration section 336 .

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific prize winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, it is placed at the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 for 0.9 seconds. It is configured so that the ball does not reach the detection sensor SE1 that is to be detected. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening and closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not move to the position of the slide displacement member 370, and the ball cannot pass through either the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. , the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the wrong winning of the ball.

Therefore, for example, control to release the opening and closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning to the V winning sensor, which is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with V probability variable attackers. control with naturalness) can be dispensed with. As a result, the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening operates in a natural manner, thereby providing the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine provided with the V probability variable attacker in the above example, the ball entering the ball immediately after the V probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, Conversely, the entering ball has a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball). .

The time required for the sphere to pass through can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the channel forming portions 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the channel (whether it is smooth or uneven).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type , and is defined in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A1 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 19" in association with the jackpot A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 39" in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40 to 49" in association with the big winning B2 (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with the jackpot C1 (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with the jackpot C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C2 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, when a big win is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the 4-round big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls compared to the case of a big win in the lottery for the special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operating pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big win, 15 rounds of the big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 1, so that the player can enjoy the special pattern. It is possible to increase the motivation of playing a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game of shooting a ball so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern that has the disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery. By setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the big win in the third operation pattern, the influence of the disadvantages can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the big win game can be emphasized. .

That is, since the possibility of delaying the big win game in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be reduced, the big win game which is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of putting out prize balls is good) can be realized.

In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol 2 jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Also, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that the player can be prevented from casually playing the big winning game. In other words, the player can visually recognize the displacing motion of the slide displacing member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacing motion, and enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, the variable probability state of the special symbols is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbols, and when it becomes a jackpot, it is easy to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning prize opening 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing changes over time in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the big winning game (of the determined type). Operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be described below. Note that FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 25 .

Incidentally, in this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is common in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the open/close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting for preventing a plurality of balls from entering one side of the specific winning port 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering balls in a row"). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at once.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. It is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through each flow path forming part 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. The slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position, and after 0.8 seconds have passed, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced from the rear side position to the front side position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes through the upper side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the state in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 second as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, and that the ball is the third flow passage forming portion. It is set from the idea that it takes longer than the time it takes to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening and closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member is applied after the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow passage forming part 336 regardless of the ball entering timing ( See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration portion 334 ~ 336 as a ball entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or normal detection sensor SE12 can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility that the ball will block the line of sight is low, and the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the line of sight of the player is tend to gather on the spheres flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 . That is, by drawing attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Attention to the flowing sphere!" can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each flow passage forming part 334 to 336 is configured so as to be separated at the center of the left and right, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on the left or right side, the ball will enter. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path forming portion 336 on the side not facing, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being blocked by the flowing ball (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving attention to the ball. In addition, the player can easily visually recognize whether the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big win B1 or the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the open/close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the open/close plate 65b is operated for a long time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering a ball in succession").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the ball flow interval does not change from the time of launch, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened once every 1.0 seconds. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball reaches each flow passage forming portion 334 before the two balls pass through each flow passage forming portion 334 to 336. Entering into ~336 can be restricted.

In the case of the big win B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, visibility is not lowered by other balls, so the game is played. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. , which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the case of a big win C1, a big win C2 or a big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the first operation time T1 (up to 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. The opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time within the operation time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the open/close plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next ball is opened before the two balls pass through each of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. It is also possible for the ball to enter the passage forming portions 334 to 336 . Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the ball arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is improved by the ball arranged on the upstream side in the third operation pattern. It is easy for the situation to fall.

In the case of the big win C1 or the big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit C2, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is normal. It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

Thus, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or passed through the normal detection sensor SE12, the control mode is such that the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in an open state. Since the time required to reach the point is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball engagement can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, visibility is not lowered by other balls, so the game is played. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of side balls may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the round game R of the first round. Arrangement of spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to deteriorate.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be performed early. That is, as a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls), a specified number of balls Winning can be easily fulfilled at an early stage, and delay of a big winning game can be avoided.

In particular, the special symbol 2 jackpot is 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is originally low.

Therefore, even if the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the delay of the big win game, thereby realizing the progress of the big win game in a short time. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, the round game R of the second round is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is controlled to open the opening 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is normally ejected after passing through the detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

When the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this control example, the short-open displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the 3rd round, the 8th round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening patterns (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b. The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged downstream of the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the third passage forming portion 336 can be made different. As a result, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow passage forming part 336 can be motivated to devise a shooting mode of the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, so if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the shooting interval of the ball (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the first operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the shooting mode.

On the other hand, if the ball shooting interval is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 seconds) is left after the start of the round game R, the ball is caused to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Also good. In this case, at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y), the situation where the ball is arranged in the third flow path forming part 336 is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from blocking the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 .

On the other hand, if there is a period until the balls are launched, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so there is a possibility that the round game R will be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can enter through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

That is, for example, the above-described firing mode that widens the shooting interval of the ball and the firing mode that increases the time until the ball is fired are maintained when the ball is entered on the left side, and the ball is fired in an arbitrary firing mode when the ball is entered on the right side. The same effect as described above can be achieved even if the game is played by shooting.

Specifically, as a shooting mode in which the ball is shot toward the specific winning hole 65a separately to the left and right, at least the first ball is shot to the right, and the number of shots (for example, the second ball) is shot to the right. to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, by not paying attention to the spheres flowing down the right channel as each of the flow channel constituting parts 334 to 336, but focusing on the spheres flowing down the left channel, it is possible to avoid the line of sight being blocked by other spheres. While, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are continuously shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid the extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to avoid delaying the round game R.

It should be noted that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left channel. In particular, it suffices if the number of balls arranged in each of the left flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of the balls passes through the left flow path, and other periods In , it is sufficient to separately hit the ball so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning port 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the number of ball entry paths is small. ), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading for the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls spills to the left and right outer sides of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be left-right symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

26 is a front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the opening 511a. 26 and 27 will refer to FIG. 2 as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged in the inner right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 arranged in the inner lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510 . A substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the left inside of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side. A diffusion decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is positioned to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is positioned below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is positioned above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510 . First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. 29, the state in which the first operation unit 600 has changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated, FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is shown in a state in which the surface of the covering member 787 facing forward is different from that of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIG.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized inside the center frame 86, but outside the center frame 86, the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. The field of view is likely to be blocked by nails, various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2) provided on the base plate 60. Therefore, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, the roles are the same. In addition, the inner frame of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, but the outer frame of the center frame 86 is not curved downward, and the center frame 86 is curved downward. On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is protruded so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward and the third operation unit 800 is shown separately combined, and in FIG. A coalesced state is illustrated.

31 and 32 occurs in a displacement mode combining linear motion displacement and rotational displacement. Since the collision with the decorative members 870 and 880 causes a problem, the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced downward to a degree sufficient to avoid the collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the waiting state for presentation). On the premise that the displacement of 870, 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to execute reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details are described later.

FIG. 33 shows the third action unit 800 in the extended state and the second action unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly downwardly displaced from the extended state, and FIG. 34 shows the state of FIG. 600 is shown displaced to the intermediate effect state, and in FIG. 35, from the state of FIG. illustrated.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third motion unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first motion unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second motion unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), and the state of the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes from the presentation standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change from the effect standby state of the unit 800 to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the presentation standby state, By setting the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second operation unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. Overlapping can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases where the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruded state closer to the opening 511a and in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is slightly receded from the opening 511a but is arranged close to the third operation unit 800. By constructing the states, the function of the second action unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first motion unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. The second decoration rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member 661. The box-shaped member 661 has a first rendering surface 661a facing obliquely to the left in the rendering standby state, and a first rendering surface 661a. It has a second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b. Each rendering surface 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

When the first action unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the second decoration rotating member 660 is arranged at a position on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, where the visibility from the front side tends to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is oriented obliquely toward the player side (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with reference to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a From the inside of the frame of the opening of the pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, the second decorative rotating member 660 is viewed obliquely through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the second decoration rotary member 660 projects in front of the third pattern display device 81, thereby allowing the player who visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86 to face it. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented with the second rendering surface 661b facing directly in front, so the visibility of the second rendering surface 661b from the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 is can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the performance surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and the visibility of each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player can be changed. For the purpose of improvement, it is configured so that the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is not limited to planar posture changes parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but is designed to provide angle changes intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is oriented forward and backward, making it easier for the player to face the player. Since the line of sight of the player tends to become oblique as it is placed closer to the frame of the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by making the performance surface oblique to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction therewith. The protruding decorative portion 652b has a decoration such as a figure or a pattern on the front surface of the plate. By placing it in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front view. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the right end portion of the external shape of the projecting decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and in the waiting state of the first operation unit 600 for rendering, the second decorative rotary member The left edge of the first rendering surface 661a of 660 and the region right end RE1 of the region in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized approximately match.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the plate front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appears as if the area right end RE1 can be made to appear to the player as if it were expanding beyond the As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a similar polka dot pattern is used as the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, A certain number is written on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b in the same typeface as the typeface of the numbers (for example, numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery) variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above-mentioned display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which the third pattern display device 81 is colored in one color, and a wooden stick arranged so as to align the right end with the region right end RE1 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a flame is modeled on the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a way that it is associated with ignition when the first operation unit 600 is extended.

Note that the presentation mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the projecting decorative portion 652b. Light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the projecting decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that the area beyond the right end RE1 of the region can be displayed. It is possible to avoid the limitation of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when enlarging the display area.

Further, the object to be associated with the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (for example, the covering member 787). , the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b, and the decorations formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering portion 875, the second decoration of the installation portion 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its attitude. By relatively displacing on the basis of , the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; , a first decorative rotary member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotary member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotary member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610 .

The means to be fixed 610 is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction, and the base member 611 is arranged on the front side of the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611 . and a front lid member 612 fastened to and secured to the .

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640 are provided. Prepare.

The elongated guide hole 616 is formed with a unique shape in which straight portions and curved portions are mixed, the details and operation of which will be described later.

Rotating member 620 has main body 621 formed in the shape of a long plate, and one end (lower end) of main body 621 and is externally supported by support fastening portion 615 of fixed means 610 . a transmission long hole 623 formed in the intermediate portion of the body portion 621 as a long hole extending in a straight line direction; A circular through-hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through-hole 624 Prepare.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622 . The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm contacts the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm contacts the projecting piece of the front cover member 612. It is configured such that an urging force is generated in the viewing clockwise direction).

In addition, in the axial support of the cylindrical portion 622 , a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip portion of the support fastening portion 615 while the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622 . be. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The long transmission hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding rearward through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in mesh with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported in the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 in mesh with the transmission gear 633. 634;

In a state in which the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are inserted into the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c, fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d extending along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-described cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in the outer diameter direction. and a setting portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted through the long transmission hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. As a result, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extended portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the back side of the main body portion 641 and having a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642 and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to engage with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the tubular portion 643 . , a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending to the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 can be meshed to generate driving force transmission.

With the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported by the body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed cylindrical portion 645 has the bottom rear side arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decoration rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the bottom front side. and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape around the center of the cylindrical shape and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decoration rotating member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

The first decorative rotary member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a perpendicular rotary shaft, a front rotary member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotary member 652. A decorative substrate 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and having a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side, A wire receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space through which wires pass, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It has a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a perpendicular rotation member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported in a cylindrical portion formed by the wire receiving member 655 and the main body member 651 .

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a extending cylindrically on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diametrical positions of the distal end thereof. It has a notch 651c which is cut to reduce the wall on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the front lid. The member 612 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 616, and a fastening screw inserted through the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female screw portion 651b at the tip of the member 612 to be fastened and fixed.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed tubular portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported and guided by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaceable along the slot 616 .

An opening C2a is formed in a part of the circumference of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, and the opening C2a is arranged opposite to the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state to provide a path for electric wiring. to form

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided inside the second ornamental rotating member 660 , and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 662 . In addition, the other wires are formed in the gap formed between the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 (the upper side, that is, the side facing the body member 651 on the opposite side of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal is guided to the back of the projecting decorative portion 652 b through the gap) and connected to the connector of the electrical decoration board 653 .

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. It should be noted that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than over the entire circumference, as a sufficient arrangement for operations to be described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An electric decoration board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the decorative projection 652b, and the projection decorative part 652b is illuminated or blinked by light emitted from a light emitting means arranged on the electric decoration board 653. It is possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651 d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655 a of the wiring receiving member 655 , and is the gear of the front side rotating member 652 . It includes gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears mateable with teeth 652a.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652 . That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of the operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The second decorative rotary member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 that is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotary member 657 , an electrical board 662 that is fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661 , and a box-shaped member 661 . and the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 and fastened and fixed to the distal end portions of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later, rotates, the electrical board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring clamp plate 663 having a through-hole for temporarily fastening the wiring prevents the wiring from being twisted or disorderly. We are trying to avoid being placed in

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the electrical board 662, twisting of the electrical wiring is unavoidable. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one rotation or more, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees. It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring is twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side. be.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The electrical board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 are aligned. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the decorative board 662, the first rendering surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged on the front side and whose optical axis is oriented in the thickness direction. The second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs, and the third rendering surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second rendering surface 661b) and whose optical axis is directed in the width direction. be

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the rendering surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LEDs that illuminate the third rendering surface 661c are located on the back side (the second rendering surface 661b). illuminating side), illuminates the third rendering surface 661c (the surface facing upward) in the state where the second rendering surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED is caused to emit light, the second rendering surface 661b can be illuminated with light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the electrical decoration board 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the electrical decoration board 662, so that the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third rendering surface 661c. can also illuminate As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of rendering modes in which the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated, or to improve the brightness of the second rendering surface 661b during the light emitting rendering.

The decoration fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and has decoration characters and figures formed thereon so that the player can visually recognize it. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always inclined to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the eyes of the player are likely to be arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised toward the back side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front cover member 612 . This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600; FIG. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and fastening screws is omitted.

In the performance standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623 (for example, parallel). Thereby, the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding in the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertia assistance cannot be obtained compared to the middle of displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase. , it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

In addition, the same thing is configured to hold for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the long transmission hole 623 at both end positions (the position in the standby state for the effect, the position in the overhanging state) of the rotating member 620 is the direction of the long transmission hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (eg parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decoration rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be changed depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 crosses the rotating shaft at right angles. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotary member 660 .

The rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a , and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652 a of the front rotating member 652 . That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is It is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

Next, the displacement of the first action unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. 43 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state. 45 is a front view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect waiting state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotating angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the extended state. is set to

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decoration rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third rendering surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first action unit 600, the second rendering surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide long hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved line (substantially arc-shaped) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. and a curvilinear portion 616b formed at the .

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the extended state is the curved portion It is configured to have a curvilinear displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be changeable in state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the change in state. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first ornamental rotating member 650, and the second ornamental rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the long guide hole 616 will increase the displacement resistance generated between the long guide hole 616 and the rotary member 620 in this embodiment. This is suppressed by arranging the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 along the direction of displacement.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the waiting state for rendering (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, since the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right, the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend obliquely upward to the right. It is

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion displaced inside the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) can be reduced. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the supported member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity; FIG. As for the positive and negative values, positive indicates downward displacement and negative indicates upward displacement. In FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47 , the arrangement of the supporting positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 . Rotating member 620 in the extended state is shown in solid lines.

47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. there is

The guide long hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is arranged. Displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is displacement caused by displacement of the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 as the rotating member 620 rotates. Hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An overview of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is due to the vertical displacement of the tip of the rotating member 620 (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620, and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. It is generated as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the performance standby state, in addition to the fact that the supported member 640 is in the vertical posture, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is positioned at 45 degrees to the left and right from the vertical). range). In other words, there are two conditions for the displacement in the vertical direction to be small.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are duplicated. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. Displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide long hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop violently. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (position in the middle of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide long hole 616, a mode is adopted in which a curved portion 616b is combined with a linear portion 616a below. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight in the linear portion 616a and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from vigorously falling beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

Displacement of the driven member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the standby state for the effect, the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate effect state, the driving side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the left side of the linear portion 616a. placed (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocatingly displaced while the rotating member 620 is tilted without changing direction.

As a result, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640. FIG.

According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate sliding displacement in the left-right direction by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 centering on the driven side. The load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required to start the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured according to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 . The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation in which the displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

The action produced by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600. FIG. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state where the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to employ a curved portion for the guide slot 616 . In other words, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above, the long guide hole 616 may be composed only of linear portions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the use of the curved portion 616b prevents the speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or guided by the curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward. Downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces in the opposite direction (rightward) to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640. ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is aligned with the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 ( A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the leftward direction.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung to the left and right. A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 . That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to the end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities are the same. If the displacement is slow at the start of displacement, the displacement speed increases in the final stage.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the imaginary axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown for comparison in FIG. and becomes maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640 . In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis line O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end, the vertical displacement amount of the imaginary axis line OE1 during the same period. The quantity UE1 becomes large.

Therefore, in the displacement state of the imaginary axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back. adversely affect performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is shifted to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. Also, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

Uniformity in this case means not only that the velocity is brought to the same level over the entire range of displacement, but also means that the magnitude of the velocity is suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually increases on the entry start side into the curved portion 616b, and the supported member 640 enters the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b. It is configured such that the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side portion of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up). Since the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced at the start of driving in the case of operation), the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing changes in the angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624 and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 . That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 38) are both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the rotation member 657 perpendicular to the axis are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 .

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 44). 90 degrees from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted rightward by 45 degrees). Accordingly, every time the state is switched from the intermediate effect state to the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43) and then the second effect surface 661c. The effect surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the elongated guide hole 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640 . That is, in this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decoration rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the output of the detection sensor KS1 is used as the basis of the output of the second decorative rotating member 660. The placement and attitude can be determined by the audio ramp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extended portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is started from that state. , the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of rotating member 620 . Therefore, when judging the arrangement and orientation of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to calculate the numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Further, as a result, even when rotating the rotating member 620 at a constant speed, it is possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decoration rotating member 660 from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

A change in the angle θ is substantially the same as a change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state is generally greater than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). large (approximately 20 degrees during 5 degree rotation of the rotating member 620 while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the effect waiting state to the intermediate effect state. below the level of angular change to state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotating member 620 is configured to change, so that the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 also changes. can be configured to That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, and the posture can be easily maintained. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to increase, and a state in which the surfaces facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly can be achieved.

With the above-described configuration, the displacement motion of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be adjusted. In the displacing operation of the second ornamental rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement and attitude change due to the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. and rotational displacement about the rotation axis are performed simultaneously.

The rotational angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is determined by the following: It becomes conspicuously large at the timing of entering.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 moves up and down (bounces back) somewhat from the position of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state. However, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotary member 660 directs the third rendering surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the attitude change in the rotating direction increases. conspicuously visible. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In this embodiment, the second rendering surface 661b of the second ornamental rotating member 660 faces the front side at the end of rotation (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the ornamental fixing member 670. In order to be visually recognized integrally (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from rebounding upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. It is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from becoming excessively displaced on the driven side in the state of being arranged at the lower end of displacement, and prevent the supported member 640 from springing back.

In addition to the fact that the displacement speed is made uniform in this way, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotary member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotary member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643). is closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation shaft of the rotating member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from swaying due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 that are supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 . Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back around the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620 (towards the upper left). is configured to preferably impede displacement of the That is, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is slanted in the upper left direction, and the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. Rebounding of member 640 can be prevented.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement. is different from the displacement direction of the driven member 640 in .

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 is displaced downward to the left along the direction of displacement of the driven member 640 (rotating direction of the rotating member 620). By being guided by 616, it is slightly swung in the horizontal direction along the guide slot 616 and displaced downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640 , so the displacement direction is not along the long guide hole 616 but along the width direction of the long guide hole 616 . As a result, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and rebounding of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

A feature of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first motion unit 600 changes from the extended state to the presentation standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631 ) required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 mainly consists of the rotating member 620 , the supported member 640 , and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640 . It is used for upwardly displacing the rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660 and for rotating the second decorative rotary member 660 .

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660, the less the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating from the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the rotation angle is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. It is designed so that the value of the angle .theta. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second ornamental rotating member 660 centering on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is arranged in a posture facing up and down).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertia force in the rotational direction of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is The moving member 620 can be twisted about its longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a slight elastic displacement locally by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 is broken. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by abutment with the front lid member 612, and a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front lid member 612. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

Displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b will be described. The projecting decorative portion 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and the rotational angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the layout of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when the performance standby state changes to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates as long as the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the presentation standby state to the projecting state is about 135 degrees, and the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotated by about 45 degrees. Here, if the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the effect standby state, it seems to collide with the other operation units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which serves as a reference for rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, rotates clockwise, the position of the other operating unit 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) is changed. Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, since the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacing the decorative projecting portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the projecting decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the arrangement of the supported member 640 changes from the projecting state to the rendering standby state. , the projecting decorative portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operation unit 800, or partially hides the projecting display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. There is a possibility that it will have an adverse effect on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the driven side of the supported member 640 is used as a reference, and the protruding decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the driven side of the supported member 640. When the member 640 protrudes toward the third symbol display device 81, it protrudes interlockingly, and when the member 640 to be supported is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 to the retracting side, it retracts interlockingly. Therefore, the projecting decorative portion 652 b in the retracted state can be arranged on the side away from the third pattern display device 81 .

The rotation angle of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's line of sight can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. FIG. That is, the difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees is 45 degrees.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the attitude of the supported member 640 is the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620 . That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle .theta. The difference between the change and the change is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. FIG.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the decorative projecting portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant angular velocity, Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, the player will feel as if the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

By configuring in this way, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that there are sections where there is sliding movement and there are sections where there is rotational movement from the player's eye level. The displacement mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section in which the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section in which the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the decorative projecting portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. It is influenced by the side that becomes dominant as

Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that the overhang decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, and it is stretched in a section where the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. It can be visually recognized as if the outward decoration portion 652b is slidably displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated and displaced so as to constitute the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, and the case of being displaced from one end of displacement to the other end of displacement has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to displace in the opposite direction at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating and displacing the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed so as to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of its descent, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to set the stop position accurately.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the amount of rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force allocated to the second decoration rotating member 660 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, the rotational speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if it is not set, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second motion unit 700 is a motion unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is the field of view of the player viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28). In order to secure the production waiting state (see FIG. 28) to retreat below the opening 511a, and the overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention, and in between The state is mainly switched between an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of .

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the up/down reversal effect device 770 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 , the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510 and a front plate member 710 between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 . a rotating arm member 720 arranged to be rotatable about the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510; An elevating plate member 740 configured to be vertically displaceable by connecting the tip of the rotating arm member 720 so as to be guided, and a left rear side which is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front side support members 760 configured as a left and right pair and fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and the front side of the metal rod 702 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . and an up-and-down reversal effect device 770 configured to be capable of displacing the up-and-down plate member 740 and the front side support member 760 in a combination of up-and-down displacement and front-back direction displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion and forms a gap with the rear case 510, A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a sensor 713 that faces the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined portion 714 is formed so as to be inclined and formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed is formed. and a plurality of fastened portions 718 .

The detection sensors 713 are arranged at intervals such that a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged with detection grooves at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 detects the position of the detected portion 735 in the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, the position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operation unit 700, and the extension of the second operation unit 700. , the position of the detected portion 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, or an extended state, and the output result is used by the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operation unit 700 .

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 toward the front side, and is formed in a long plate shape with a V shape when viewed from the front. and a support cylinder portion 722 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from a bent portion of the body portion 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape formed in a size that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 511b to be inserted. , a long hole portion 723 drilled along the longitudinal direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 721, and a front (projecting direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a) at the left end portion of the main body portion 721. (direction parallel to ), and a cylindrical fastened portion 724 having a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. Between the cylindrical fastened portion 725 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side and the rear case 510 which is wound around the supporting cylindrical portion 722, the body portion 721 is moved upward (left side). and a torsion spring SP2 that applies an urging force in the direction of lifting the

The left side of the main body portion 721 is stepped so as to be displaced toward the front side compared to the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722 . 701 is provided.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so that the cylindrical fastened portion 725 can be guided. A fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is moved to the support plate through the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725. It is supported by 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , the left portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from tilting the rotating arm member 720 toward the front side, thereby stably supporting the displacement of the rotating arm member 720. be able to.

The right side portion of the body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 . That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 .

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotational direction of the rotary arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. The drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side. , a transmission gear 733 meshing with the driving gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshing with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a projecting cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are axially supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734 .

The gear cam member 734 has a detected portion 735 projecting toward the front side in an arc shape centering on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and the gear cam member 734 is extended so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding portion 736a protruding cylindrically from the tip of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the output from the detection sensor 713 determines the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It has long horizontal members 742 that are fastened and fixed on the left and right sides.

The guided member 741 is formed so that the metal rod 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a vertical direction can be inserted through the guided member 741 , and the guided member 741 can be vertically displaced along the metal rod 702 . The tips of the protrusions protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontal member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 has a long hole portion 743 formed in an oval shape that is long in the left and right direction with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to pass through, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743 . A cylindrical portion 744 protruding cylindrically on the front side, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom portion at positions equidistant from the cylindrical portion 744 to the left and right. Prepare.

A fastening screw inserted through the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 , whereby the elevating plate member 740 is turned into a rotating arm via the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 . It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is inserted, and supports the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 so as to be displaceable back and forth. That is, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevation plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevation plate member 740 so as to be displaceable back and forth with the elevation plate member 740 as a reference.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773 . The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting/lowering reversal effect device 770 from each other.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a longitudinally elongated plate portion 745a and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft portions projecting outward from the plate portion 745a to the left and right. and a portion 745b.

The rotary tube portion 745b rotates when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 described above is displaced back and forth, and functions as a portion that guides the front and back displacement, the details of which will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the right side, and is formed with a rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 has a three-dimensional decoration portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material. , the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a is configured to be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front side support member 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 which is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and whose back surface faces upward. and a receiving inclined portion 762 which is inclined in a manner facing the front side as much as possible.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part that

In this fixed position, the receiving slope portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper slope portions 714 and 751 . That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. By guiding the rotary tube portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 along this guide path, the up/down reversal effect device 770 moves forward and backward. It is configured to be vertically displaced while being displaced to . The vertical displacement will be described below.

52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 52(a) and 52(b) show the effect waiting state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. In FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the intermediate rendering state of the second action unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b) illustrate the extended state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

The up-and-down displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 shown in FIGS. Driving force transmission when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced up and down will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as needed.

At the start of driving force transmission from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. Moreover, the same thing holds true in the overhanging state as well.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, so that the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotating direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Along with this, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is determined by the configuration in which the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751, the first horizontal plate 774b of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770, and the 2, the lateral plate 774c is guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting plate member 740, and the amount of the load is reduced.

That is, the pair of rotating cylinder portions 774e includes the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 which are arranged at symmetrical positions (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52 and shown in FIG. 56). ), and by rolling the rotary tube portion 774e around the cylindrical portion 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751. The displacement resistance of the body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by designing the arrangement of the rotating cylinder portions 745b aligned in the front-to-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly upward. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is designed to be positioned slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. direction is biased. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b, which is closely arranged when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is arranged slightly upward, and is closely arranged when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, since the front rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, it can stably roll with the first horizontal plate 774b. , the rear rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, so that it can stably roll with the second horizontal plate 774c. As a result, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guidance. Therefore, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction displacement as compared to when it is lowered.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is vertically displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to resist gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second motion unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement of the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 displaces the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction by the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement of the intermediate effect state.

As a result, the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the standby state of the second motion unit 700, and the stop control of the drive motor 731 is performed so as to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly different from the ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second motion unit 700 toward the intermediate effect state side.

Also, for example, when the same stop control is performed, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second motion unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descent due to its own weight is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second action unit 700 can be brought closer to the intermediate effect state side and the arrangement can be maintained.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the extended state of the second motion unit 700, and the stop control of the drive motor 731 is performed so as to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 Since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when passes the intermediate effect state downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second motion unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the effect of displacing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction along with the up-and-down displacement will be described. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it is displaced inside and outside a frame bordered by a center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of such movable accessories are designed with emphasis on appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, the player does not pay attention to them. Under the assumption that it will not be done, we often did not consider appearance.

Recently, however, the front-to-rear distance from the third pattern display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of vision such that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be seen through the inside of the center frame 86. , Since the line of sight reaches the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), if the appearance of the movable role in the state of retreating to the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 is bad, the player may may diminish interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming the decorative surface on the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is set to the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. The direction of displacement is along the line of sight of the player at the edge of the player's field of view, so that each decorative surface can easily fit into the field of view of the player. Configure.

As a result, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be placed within the visual field of the player without difficulty. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later. 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 or second secondary decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. 52 the first secondary The decorative surface 787a2) and the decorations (graphics, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed thereon are formed as mutually related decorations.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration related to each other. and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is arranged in the front and rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side thereof when the second action unit 700 is waiting for the effect. Therefore, it is necessary to switch between a state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state of paying attention to the display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving the player's line of sight.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” or “jackpot”) visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state can be displayed on the covering member 787 even in the waiting state for the effect. It may be visible to the player through the sides.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement of the performance standby state so as to be easily visually recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

In addition, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotationally displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, the contents of the decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state are different. case can occur.

For example, if the vertical reversal effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state (if overlooked or if the operation speed is excessively fast), the front If the contents of the decoration surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the standby state for the effect, so the player can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped even from the upper side, the player can visually recognize the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that it is covered in the overhanging state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents such as "chance" or "jackpot") that can be visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for a player who misses the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the waiting state for the effect. You can keep reporting. As a result, regardless of each state such as the effect waiting state or the projecting state, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be maintained high.

In the present embodiment, the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is displaced in the front-rear direction from the state arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area to the front of the rear end surface of the game area. Configuration as such displacement will be described.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second motion unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to protrude from the .

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed by the center of the center frame 86 after a ball that jumps into a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball that has flowed down the lower side rolling surface of the frame 86 to the rear and then to the front again to guide it toward the first winning hole 64 arranged in the game area. (see FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

Since the ball flowing down the flow passage forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning hole 64, the flow forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to gather on the flow path forming portion 86a. To make it easy to construct a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of a player because the effect device 780 is arranged right behind the flow path forming part 86a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52). can be done.

When the second motion unit 700 is in the effect waiting state, the covering member 787 is arranged on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)). The front portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the front portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inner side of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front and rear positions as the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front side (approaching the player side).

It should be noted that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction as the second motion unit 700 is vertically displaced. It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second rendering surface 661 b of the rotating member 660 .

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 29) and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second action unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the extended state when viewed from the front. will match, and these can be made easier to visually recognize integrally.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the effect device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate effect state and the effect standby state than in the extended state, so the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is lower than in the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 includes a body member 771 connected and supported by the lift plate member 740, and a effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with the body member 771 as a reference. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. 50 and 51 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56 as needed.

The main body member 771 has a lower elongated portion 772 elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 protruding from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , a pair of guide extending portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, and a vertically extending connecting portion integrally formed with the left and right central position of the lower long portion 772. An upper long part 775 formed to be long in the left-right direction, and a direct-acting plate member 784 of the production device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper long part 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. a plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left and right center of the upper long portion 775 to support the drive transmission device, the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion A light emitting means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775 is provided.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the tubular portion 773 through the cylindrical portion 744, tilting displacement of the body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lift plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The guide extending portion 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, and a width of the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c that is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction faces the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b) protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a toward the left and right outer sides. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d provided and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d are provided.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width than the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b so as to extend inward in the left and right direction. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanded portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the lift plate member 740 in the vertical direction. That is, by securing the width length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the main body member 771 tilts forward with the elevating plate member 740 as a reference. can be suppressed.

A pair of the tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating tubular portions 774e can contact the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and localized load can be easily avoided.

The guide portions 776 are arranged on both left and right sides in a manner in which a pair of left and right guide portions 776 are arranged vertically, and a plurality of tubular portions 776a having female threads formed on the inner peripheral side are fastened and fixed so as to connect the pair of left and right tubular portions 776a. and a plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b.

The drop-off prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. It is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a by , and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from coming off, the details of which will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d that are drilled at both upper and lower ends so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a fastening screw on the back side. and a fixed wiring retaining member 777e.

The cylindrical protruding portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby axially supporting the upside-down reversing member 781 so as not to come off. part.

A fastening screw to be screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d. is fastened to the

The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between it and the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. , the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

The light emitting means 778 consists of two left and right elongated plate-like upper and lower electrical boards 778a on which light emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light transmission board arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 778a. and a light diffusing member 778b which is a plate member formed of a flexible resin material and on which light diffusing processing is formed.

The upper electrical board 778a is provided with a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler-type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the effect device 780 by arranging an arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and the fastened portions are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, thereby making the fastening screw inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both left and right sides. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without countermeasures. , the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the production. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the insertion direction of the fastening screw can be increased.

The effect device 780 is a device configured to be displaceable by disposing an outer portion around the upper long portion 775, and is a vertically reversing member 781 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up/down reversing member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft; a pair of intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported by the intermediate arm members 783, a pair of linear motion plate members 784 supported by the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 and guided by a guide portion 776 for displacement in the left-right direction; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between a linear motion plate member 784 and an intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) by a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotating members 785 as a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 that jointly support the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotation member 785 so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed, and A covering member 787 is arranged in front and behind the end plate member 785 d and is formed with a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 .

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the rear side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding cylindrically from both ends in the lengthwise direction to the rear side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding from the front side of the body plate portion 781a in an arc centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. and an arcuate projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at its center. A vertically reversing member 781 is pivotally supported by a transmission device holding plate 777 via a transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a. When the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the drive motor 782, thereby rotating the upside-down reversing member 781. That is, the upside-down reversing member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782 .

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. As shown in FIG. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arcuate protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778 . That is, the arcuate projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture therebetween (a pair of detection sensors 778d). A position in which the arcuate protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long bar shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, A cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side penetrating at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and a bevel-like gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. ) and a bevel tooth 783c formed as a .

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a which is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 and protrudes. An arc-shaped plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. a pair of long hole portions 784c arranged parallel to each other between the long hole portions 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting toward the rear side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of projecting ridges 784e formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction and protruding on sides facing each other, and a cylindrically-shaped opening at the end of the support plate 784d and opening on the inner peripheral side of the support plate 784d. Between a pair of fastened portions 784f having internal threads formed therein, an arrangement hole 784g penetrating between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, and a shaft support member 786, a ring-shaped A ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall off the cylindrical projecting portion 784a by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the other cylindrical portion 783b from the rear side into the female thread of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner peripheral diameter that is slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is arranged close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, thereby limiting the tilting displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other-side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted. The linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off by screwing in the screw.

In the supported state (assembled state), the direct-acting plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the long hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the axial rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the ridge portion 784e defines the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the horizontal direction. It functions as a ridge, the details of which will be described later.

The arranging hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, which will be described later in detail.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member that is arranged in a left and right pair and is pivotally supported by the direct-acting plate member 784 . A recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member fixed to the metal rod 785a and disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a so as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the end plate member 785d, which is a portion projecting from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed is provided.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is arranged to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship such that it is slidable with respect to the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship such that displacement in the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the horizontal width of the ridge portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

As a result, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the rear side of the direct-acting plate member 784 so as to be axially rotatable and restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784 . In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 moves the bevel tooth portion 783c from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so as to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. to be assembled.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arranging hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. and the displacement to the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783 . Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

A tubular portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip portion of the metal rod 785a. are formed in a dimensional relationship with an interference fit, and are fitted and fixed.

The method for fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing by using an adhesive or the like may be used. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the direct-acting plate member 784 . The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e. can easily coincide with the axis passing through the rotation center of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion in which the provided metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding portion of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between itself and the half portion 784h and a magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 capable of holding the magnet Mg. and a magnet retaining half 786c formed in the shape of a square box.

When a fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 786a from the rear side and is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786, the plate portion of the shaft support member 786 is attached to the rear side of the metal rod 785a. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened as a pair in the front and rear, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and has different surfaces on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters or pictures that can be read with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface, When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) is entered, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side where the player can see, and a second secondary decorative surface 787b2 formed. The second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 52) is reached.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed into a substantially box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). and a plurality of extension portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recess portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside in a portion between the extension portions 787c. .

The extending portions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are arranged close to each other when the covering member 787 is arranged close to each other (see FIG. 26). As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be viewed integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emission effecting means 778 and the upper side of the upper long portion 775 in the center of the left and right when the covering member 787 is arranged close to the cover member 787 (see FIG. 26). It is a portion for opening the arc plate portion of , etc. to be visible, and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertically arranged state (also referred to as an upright vertically arranged state) of the vertically reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise in a front view about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the vertical reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the erect vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. be.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to be switched depending on whether the upside-down reversing member 781 is in the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of rendering device 780 .

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the horizontal direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, but there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangement in which the degree of linear motion displacement is greater.

First, to explain the outline, the structure of the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the direct acting plate member 784 is a known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside-down reversing member 781 moves toward the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in opposite left and right directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it rotates about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width length of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends). is illustrated as

57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the posture change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engagement transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at positions opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a). FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. ). In FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown to overlap each other. and the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced by transmitting the driving force. While the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Rotate in the opposite direction.

While the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b), the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement is less than the thickness of the gear teeth in the circumferential direction. Not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the 785c. That is, the amount of displacement until the representative tooth in contact rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation of an angle of 30 degrees) amount).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the attitude of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. ).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54).

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 .

As for the left shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the magnet Mg is arranged on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785 .

In this embodiment, the attracting force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). designed to be capable of generating loads exceeding

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attracting force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f. As the arrangement separates, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c released from the attracting force of the magnet Mg undergo elastic recovery and rotational displacement.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the amount of elastic recovery increases the force in the direction of rotation of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785 .

As a result, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782. Therefore, the covering member 787 can be produced while reducing the burden of control design of the driving motor 782. You can improve the effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 is caused by the attracting force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is the axial rotation member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force delays the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of translational displacement in the horizontal direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of translational displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, since the slider-crank mechanism is employed as described above, a similar action is produced. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the horizontal direction and small in the vertical direction, so the displacement in the horizontal direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation thereof is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up/down reversing member 781 is tilted toward the horizontal direction, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is smaller in the horizontal direction and larger in the vertical direction. The smaller it is, the larger the amount of rotation. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the vertically reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. Then, the degree of horizontal displacement of the direct-acting plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extended portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the effect device 780. FIG. 59(a) to 59(c) show the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 in chronological order. FIG. 59(a) shows the rendering device 780 in the upright vertically arranged state of the vertically reversing member 781, and FIG. 59(b) shows the rendering device when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in which the vertically reversing member 781 is vertically arranged in an inverted position.

The vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 57(a)) to change the state to the inverted vertically arranged state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

When the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) in front view from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). 59(a) and 59(c). ), the state can be switched repeatedly.

As described above, while the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right sides and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the covering member 787 on the right side faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the covering member 787 on the left side faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have different contents on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to make it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the decorative surface. The amount of information given to the player by the covering member 787 can be reduced.

As a result, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game is played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. It is also possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the covering member 787 .

Rotational displacement is executed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to the vicinity of the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state the first secondary decorative surface 787a2. (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is less likely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced closer to the second operation unit 700, the field of view to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes the third movement. It will be blocked by unit 800 .

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) and the production device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or The second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) in the overhanging state is prevented from being visually recognized together during rotational displacement, and the player side is prevented from being visually recognized. It is formed as a side that can attract the player's attention in the waiting state for the effect by preventing the face from facing the other side.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so the performance performance for the cost of placing the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of skillful concealment) becomes excessively low. It can make it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. can be improved.

In this embodiment, the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by translational displacement in the horizontal direction, so the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of executing rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are rotated by executing rotational displacement. 750 , the front support member 760 , and the decoration members such as the three-dimensional decoration portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787 .

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be rotated.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is based on the determination that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state from the output of the detection sensor 713. It is controlled to be executable on the premise that As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state are arranged to face the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 in the front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as a unit, and is a configuration necessary for presentation. It is preferable to be able to maintain

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be translatively displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 before being rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extension portion 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper long portion 775 can be retracted. and the connection portion with the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the lateral displacement amount of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. The surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed ignoring the appearance during rotational displacement, so the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attracting force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if there is a design change to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the effect device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg is changed to a magnet having a large attracting force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be hidden by the covering member 787 at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw inserted through the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to avoid lowering the performance effect due to the tightening screw.

In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, or designs) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. , and the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical in accordance with the right and left decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the electrical board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is likely to be visible in the dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c in the right and left decorations, avoiding areas that are conspicuously illuminated. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical.

In addition, it is naturally permitted to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c bilaterally symmetrical. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identically decorated, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the electrical decoration board 778a design can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extending portion 787c. Even in a state in which it is not surrounded by the two, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the direct-acting plate member 784 is designed to fit on the front side. It is designed to have a shape that fits within the vertical width of the left and right long parts of the upper long part 775 that is arranged in the upper part 775 . In addition, the vertical inversion member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanical part for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the effect of the appearance of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the standby state for effect, and is supported by the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. This is a unit configured to be vertically displaceable as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

60 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 60 and 61 show the parts that constitute the displacement of the third operation unit 800, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative parts arranged outside is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. As shown in FIGS. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 in a state in which the cylindrical portion 821 is inserted on the inner peripheral side, and a body portion 831 in a state in which the inner rotating member 830 is inserted on the inner peripheral side. A pivotally supported outer rotating member 840 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotating member 840 , and housed in the held member 810 . and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members connected to each other and for transmitting driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830 , the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is recessed at the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electrical wiring. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protruding portions 815 protruded on the front side as cylindrical portions that irremovably support the transmission gear 863, and a double cylindrical portion that irresistibly supports the load response gear 865 on the front side. and a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that protrude.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the central portion. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side. A disc-shaped electrical board 823 to be arranged, and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) translucent light-transmitting resin material that can cover the electrical board 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole of the tubular fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, whereby the fixed cylinder is fixed. A member 820 is non-rotatably fastened to the held member 810 .

The cylindrical portion 821 is axially penetrating on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is passed through this penetrating portion toward the front side and arranged behind the electrical board 823 . connected to the connector that

The illumination substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, inner light-emitting portions 823a arranged at the apexes of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from the vertices, and outer light-emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations at equal intervals on the circumference. And prepare. The inner light emitting portion 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (forward), and the outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is emitted to the plated portions 871a of the first decorative members 870 which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each of the first decorations is illuminated. The member 870 will be illuminated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate about the center of the circle. , the light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) is always emitted to each of the first decorative members 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction. can be irradiated to

As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the light amount of the light LD1 that irradiates the first decorative member 870 during the rotating operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side portion slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and an outer diameter side portion slidable on the circular flange portion 831 a of the inner rotary member 830 . formed in

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a tubular portion protruding rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotary member 830. As shown in FIG.

The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the circular flange portion 831a side of the body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. It is possible to reduce the possibility of damage or deformation of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 due to the load generated when the sliding is defective (when the displacement resistance becomes excessive unintentionally).

The inner rotary member 830 has a cylindrical body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the body portion 831 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in a posture along which the metal rods 832 are formed to be inserted and guided by the metal rods 832 so as to be linearly displaceable. and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer portion of the linear motion member 833 .

The body portion 831 includes the circular flange-shaped portion 831a and a plurality of sliding projections extending rearward in a ridge-like shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between the adjacent metal rods 832. It includes a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral curved surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and reduces the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 to reduce contact friction. has a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 in a switching rotation operation to be described later, and the load is applied so that the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced is displaced radially outward. Even if the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is received, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion 831b. can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission projection 864a of the central annular gear 864 is inserted. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b arranged in a linear motion displacement direction with an interval therebetween and cylindrically protruding rearward, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the projecting portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being externally fitted, it functions as a displacement restricting groove that prevents the rotation member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction, the details of which will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, the decorative members 870, 880 are attached. It functions to fasten and fix to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body portion 841 and a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at positions where the circumference of the main body portion 841 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. , a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. and a detected portion 844 extending outward.

The extended arm portion 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By screwing a fastening screw into the internal thread while the cylindrical portion 842 a is inserted through the side rod portion 851 , the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a part for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, details of which will be described later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed to be long, and includes a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the base end side rod portion 851. A thickened portion 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side on the end side, and a distal side rod portion 853 extending from the front side end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the proximal side rod portion 851 . , and a rotation transmission portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853 .

The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the direct-acting member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship such that the cylindrical projecting portion 833a is inserted thereinto and can rotate with each other; A guide hole 854b, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projecting portion 833b while it is inserted, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. and a bevel tooth portion 854c that is formed in a shape and meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical protruding portion 815 that is rotatably supported and driven. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to transmit driving force via gears 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are displaced and pivotally supported by the double cylinder projecting portion 816 so as not to fall off, and the back side of the load response gear 865 is supported by the double cylinder of the double cylinder projecting portion 816. and a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the rotational load applied to the load response gear 865 .

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted through its inner peripheral side, and is recessed so that it can be placed in the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protruding from the bottom plate portion toward the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a bottom plate having a coaxial double ring shape disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion toward the front side.

In the assembled state, the rear end portion of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is intermediately fitted in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission projection portion 864a is inserted into the concave portion 831c. Or they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the concave portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equidistant, they can be assembled without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 by aligning the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c. can be done. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the direction of rotation (same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Equal spacing is effective because it is thought that there is little effect due to the shift during assembly.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours for assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotary member 830 is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is not installed. The arrangement can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 .

The load response gear 865 is arranged to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Due to the torque limiter 866 engaging the load responsive gear 865, the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840 causes the load responsive gear It is configured to switch between a state in which the rotation of 865 is permitted and a state in which it is restricted (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and cancel transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is configured as a set with opposite transmission directions, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 62 and 63 show the decorative portion of the third motion unit 800 and omit the illustration of the portion for configuring the displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 includes the inner rotating member 830 described above, and a cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 that is fastened and fixed to one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834b. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first frame portion 871 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that covers one side of the first frame portion 871. , provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures, patterns, and character patterns (hereinafter also referred to as “patterns, etc.”) are drawn on the surface. When the front side faces the front side, the player is made to visually recognize the pattern or the like.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on each of the plurality (five) of the first covering portions 875 . Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits strong light under the light emission control by the illumination board 823 or by changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern that attracts the player's attention can be changed. can let

For example, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect to draw attention to which first covering portion 875 stops on the side of the third symbol display device 81 from the player's line of sight. is controlled to rotate, it is possible to continuously change the first covering portion 875 on the side of the third symbol display device 81 along with the rotation. line of sight can be focused on the first covering portion 875 .

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (close position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, the integrity of the second covering portion 885 can be ensured in the combined state (particularly, one combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covering portion 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as “patterns, etc.”) drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the patterns, etc. are displayed in the game. make people see.

In the present embodiment, a pattern or the like drawn on a plurality (five in this embodiment) of the second covering portions 885 is a set of a plurality (at least two, maximum five) of the second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is arranged in a circular shape so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a “circular body” in a front view. It is decorated to form a part of the body.

Although the pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the one-unit state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not cause a big difference even if the arrangement of the is different. In other words, the design is such that the pattern does not have a clear top, bottom, left, and right, and the change in the outer shape is inconspicuous even when it is rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the effect performance when the second covering parts 885 are visually recognized by the player can be improved. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 strongly integrates the second covering portion 885 in the combined state. It is possible to improve the performance performance in the state.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed back and forth by a switching rotation operation, which will be described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw is also reversed when viewed from the front.

Even in this case, the metal screws attracted by the magnets Mg2 are merely replaced by the metal screws screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent to the opposite side. Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this avoids a decrease in performance performance.

That is, since independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first covering portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly deviated, the game can be played. There is no possibility that the pattern or the like that the person visually recognizes cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the rendering performance of the rendering using the pattern or the like drawn on the first covering portion 875 .

Furthermore, since the strength of integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, vibration caused by (stopping from) up-and-down displacement, and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation and switching rotation operation ), the arrangement of the united first covering portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement manner that cannot be realized in a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. The rendering effect of rendering by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

In view of the above circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also called the individually combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. is also called a one-confederate state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual coalesced state and the single coalesced state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a) and 66(b). ), FIGS. 67( a ) and 67 ( b ) are front views of the outer rotary member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840, thereby displacing the intermediate arm member 850. are shown in chronological order.

64(a) and 66(a), the inner rotary member 830 is shown rotating by 45 degrees from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)). .

64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is indicated as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. FIG. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotating member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840 . In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840. FIG.

From the configuration between the members described above, the imaginary position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. A change in the position of the supported hole 854 a corresponds to a change in the position of the direct-acting member 833 .

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and at the same time is displaced in the circumferential direction. The member 834 similarly displaces radially about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaces circumferentially. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position. Therefore, compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear motion displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversal operation described above in the second operation unit 700), the effect during the switching rotation operation is improved. can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, by generating a rotating operation with high acceleration using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), , the placement of the covering member 787 at the linear movement direction outer displacement end (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the fixed impression.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation of the covering member 787, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased. Even in a situation where the period near the dead point of the slider crank continues, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high rendering effect due to the operation of the covering member 787 .

Since the switching rotation includes displacement in the radial direction, a radial load is likely to be applied from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 will deviate. In the embodiment, the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 similarly occur at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the axis of rotation, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs with rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by determining the posture of the lifting arm member 801 when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

In addition, along with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmission portion 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. displaced and, at the same time, displaced in the circumferential direction.

By rotationally displacing the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member 834 are engaged. Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 rotate about the metal rod 832 .

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. ), and is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

Since the rotation member 834 assumes a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E (180 in this embodiment) is the maximum value of the angle θ31. degree), and the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 is rotated halfway (rotated 180 degrees). ).

That is, the rotation angle of the rotating member 834 around the metal rod 832 is twice the rotation angle around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) causes rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 around the metal rod 832. It does not produce an action that delays rotation with respect to

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, a gap is generated between the second decorative members 880 adjacent to each other, and the adsorption force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 is lost. No retarding effect occurs.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be quickly started and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement about the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

The quickness at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be different.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can be rotated together is 45 degrees. , the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and the angle θ32 is 27 degrees when the virtual position line 832F is rotated by an angle of 45 degrees (FIG. 67(a) reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible than during rotation. As a result, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the driving motor 861 is used for rotating the inner rotating member 830, rotating the intermediate arm member 850, and rotating the ornamental members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required for rotating the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from the possible state, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate is not excessive. You can avoid getting bigger.

In addition, since the decorative members 870 and 880 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832 while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during rotational displacement can be kept low. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surfaces between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible. The degree of freedom in designing the side portion of the can be improved.

During the switching rotation operation, the middle arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent middle arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement of the extended arm portion 842 adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the self is supported is arranged overlaps. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with surrounding parts.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 forward and backward for each part. That is, by arranging the distal side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal side rod portion 851 and the distal side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front and rear, and collision can be avoided during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extension arm portion 842 and the distal end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extension arm portion 842, switching rotation operation can be performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (the counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ) was explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state), or in a direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state). When the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction even after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted due to rotation in the rotational direction (for example, reaching from the individually combined state to the single united state), the outer A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865 , and the attitude maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the direction of rotation, the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the restriction of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first ornamental member 870 and the second ornamental member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotating operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In this embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other and are combined.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation motion in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider the collision with the surrounding decorative members, so the third motion unit 800 waits for the effect. A co-rotating motion can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the co-rotation motion is feasibly controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 .

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) causes the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to undergo a switching rotational movement accompanied by displacement in the radial expansion direction, and integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radial displacement. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any action in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the states shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Rotating motion can be performed, and integral rotating motion can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front. cannot be executed.

Further, for example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and the integral rotation operation cannot be immediately performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of this embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861 is restricted or permitted. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The drive motor 861 can be driven and controlled in an appropriate driving direction based on the determination result. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800. FIG.

During the reversal performance, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and during the normal performance, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. , after grasping the state of the movable portion from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed so as to execute the control during the normal presentation. As a result, even if the state of the movable portion cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from erroneously colliding with the surrounding decorative members. .

Forward rotation and reverse rotation are described as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 . The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation is immediately performed in the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode that immediately executes the switching rotation operation in the individually combined state).

First, the drive control during the normal effect before reaching the time of the reversal effect will be described. During this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions.

Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing. For example, by driving the driving motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the vertical movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause motion.

Of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the elevation arm member 801 is fixed. The lifting operation of the lifting arm member 801 may be performed while the integral rotation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output can be determined. , the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position. can be controlled to stop at the posture of

Next, drive control at the time of reversal effect will be described. First, during the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third motion unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving the reverse rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation is started, the outer rotating member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions. Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing.

Since the drive motor 861 only rotates in the reverse direction, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 .

When switching from the reversal performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

Then, the integral rotation motion of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is performed. After the integral rotation operation is started, the portion to be detected 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the outer rotation member 840 starting to rotate, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the normal presentation is performed again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect which are arranged before the reversal effect described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. It can also be used for the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the single combined state.

Therefore, when performing control to switch to the one union state at the timing of the announcement of the big win in the action presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the presence or absence of the announcement of the big win from the attitude of the first decorative member 870.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the decoration in the one union state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotational direction, as described above. That is, even if the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged differently in the direction of rotation at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content perceived by the player as a united state at the end of the switching rotation operation is the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one united state are arranged differently in the rotational direction, the integral rotation operation for matching the attitude after reaching the one united state can be omitted, so the first decorative member in the individually united state. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot announcement can be the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integrated rotation operation in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 . Therefore, compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with the single drive motor 861. FIG.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylindrical fixed portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the electrical board 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and the terminals are connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 823 . Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electrical board 823 are configured to be capable of controlling light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the electrical decoration board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central side of the translucent decorative member 824. As shown in FIG. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion visible to the player at the center of the circle around which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the electrical decoration substrate 823 is emitted to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (the first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 Acts to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individually combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880 with the light LD1.

In the individually united state (see FIG. 69), the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 reflects the light to the front side, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 to the front side. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 can be favorably increased when the light LD1 is emitted.

Here, in this embodiment, the electrical decoration substrate 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it. The placement relationship can be changed by rotation of the decorative members 870,880. For example, if the center of the plated portion 871a is irradiated with the light LD1 during rotation, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated at a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light with a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to execute the production to make

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plated portion 871a capable of reflecting the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the decorative substrate 823. and its center is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is oriented in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the plated portion 871a It moves toward the side and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 .

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with reference to the outer light emitting part 823b, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875. FIG. As a result, the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875 can be stably irradiated with light, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during integral rotation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion to be plated in the same manner as the plated portion 871a, and includes an outer plated portion 871b arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. Prepare. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a. The degree of light can be weakened.

This avoids a situation in which the intensity of the light seen outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzled, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875 is lowered. be able to.

The electrical board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so that all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is emitted to the inner side. is not irradiated to

First, the internal structure is visible in FIG. A gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plated portion 871b protrudes outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plated portion 871b.

In addition, between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885, which is arranged to face the metal rod 832, there is no member interference with the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required to avoid

First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring a sufficient length of the metal rod 832. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear motion displacement of the member 834 .

Secondly, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted through the frame portions 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are attached to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, the gap VA2 is formed thirdly for the purpose of ensuring a path for light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equally-spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is seen as a light that

Therefore, by integrally rotating the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b (for example, while continuing full lighting), while the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emitting mode.

In the united state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the second skeleton portion 881 from reflecting the light LD1.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the frame of the second covering portion 885 with the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is distant from the optical axis. can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the center of rotation of the third operation unit 800 can be increased.

The frame of the second covering portion 885 is formed of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed on the inside. A light diffusing decorative portion 885c is arranged along the circumference. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and the light diffusion decorative portion 885c as a whole acts to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decorative portions 885c arranged in the circumferential direction. 885c can produce an effect that is integrally visible to the player.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the rendering performance when the player visually recognizes the second covering portions 885 by firmly integrating the plurality of second covering portions 885 together. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832. , projecting toward the first decorative member 870 with respect to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third action unit 800 is obliquely viewed in the one union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is visible to the player. The degree of entry can be lowered, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

Accordingly, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side. At times, it is possible to make it easier to prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 alone is in the extended state in the one united state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where both the other operation units 600 and 700 are in the extended state (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and it is easy for a line of sight to see the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the side of the third operation unit 800 is visible, which tends to reduce the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is arranged rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface in the one united state, so the third operation when viewed obliquely. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be viewed as the second covering portion 885, and the visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. As a result, the second covering portion 885 can be seen more easily than the first covering portion 875 in the one union state, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individually combined state and the united state, the driving force of the driving motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, so that the inner rotating member 830 rotates, while the outer rotating member 840 acts as a torque limiter. A load from 866 stops the rotation.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding protrusion 831b, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases when the inner rotating member 830 itself has a large rotational resistance. Inevitably, the allowable value of the load transmission of the torque limiter 866 is likely to be hindered.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation are only the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other portions are configured to leave a gap. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to provide a stopper to suppress forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864. A sliding member 825 serves as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in the direction of pushing forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 is in contact with the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 in the front-rear direction. touch.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the rear surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A protrusion 822b protruding to the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the ridge portion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the sliding member 825 is in contact with the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a. can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotating direction can be reduced.

In addition, since no fastening screw is used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830, which is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases, is reduced accordingly. can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. 62 and 63 will be referred to when explaining this fixation.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 into a female screw of a fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875 . After the first covering portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing it into, the overhanging portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is accomplished by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 into a female screw of a fastening portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885 . After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by screwing it into the second skeleton portion 881, the protruding portion 883 that protrudes from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this manner, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotary member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 can be fixed together as the rotary member 834 is linearly displaced or rotationally displaced. Member 880 can be configured for linear displacement or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (positioning of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) are defined, and the skeleton portions 871 and 881 can be prevented from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

Since the skeletal portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotary member 834 is assembled to the linear motion member 833 , the portions that define the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 are fixed to the rotary member 834 . , unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the direct-acting member 833 is formed on the rotary member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

That is, at the time of disassembly, for example, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the frame portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the restriction on the arrangement of the frame portions 871 and 881 on the direct-acting member 833 can be released. In addition, it is possible to cancel the restriction on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the direct-acting member 833 . Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) are an operation unit 500 schematically explaining examples of combined operations of the operation units 600 to 800 in chronological order. It is a schematic front view of the. Note that FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

70 and 71, each rendering surface 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each decorative surface 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering portion 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decoration in is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by letters or the like.

That is, on the first effect surface 661a, the characters "NORMAL" are written vertically, on the second effect surface 661b, the characters "ACTIVE" are written horizontally, and on the third effect surface 661c, the characters are written in the longitudinal direction. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the characters "Open War", the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 has the characters "Pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the characters "Attack". are illustrated, and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated with the characters "Patience!?"

In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are shown inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and on the second covering portion 885, five digits are integrated as “○”. ” symbols are shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the action units 600 to 800 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second action unit 700, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in FIG. 70(b), the first action unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second action unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state.

By executing the integral rotation motion of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative members 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first motion unit 600 to an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation motion or after the stop, the third effect surface 661c is protruded inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the motion units 600 to 800 are moved. You can liven up your movements.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so as to increase the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600. can.

When the integral rotation motion is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operating unit 700 are displayed. can be viewed integrally.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed by the third pattern display device. By returning the third action unit 800 to the effect waiting state while starting at 81 , the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81 .

The first decoration member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 . For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to irradiate the first decorative member 870 with light, an LED that irradiates the light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to which attention is directed. is turned on and other LEDs are turned off, it is possible to draw attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870 .

At this time, the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. The player may be allowed to view the image as shown. In addition, the LEDs to be lit are fixed, and by utilizing the fact that the respective first decorative members 870 sequentially reach the positions where light is emitted from the LEDs by integral rotation, the first decorations to which the light is emitted are arranged. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), both the second decoration rotating member 660 and the decoration fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 have vertically long decorations and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction in the same manner as the first rendering surface 661a in the standby state for rendering, thereby enhancing the effect of being visually recognized integrally.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the course shown in FIG. Since the second decorative rotary member 660 of the unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixed member 670 is lowered, and the second operation unit 700 having a horizontally elongated decoration is used. can be viewed integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700, if the second motion unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the integrally visible effect can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging in a visible position, and the above-described effect of visually making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 expand to the right from the region right end RE1 causes the third pattern display device 81 to expand. Even if the arrangement of the second performance surface 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second effect surface 661b as if it were arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1. It is possible to enhance the effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are viewed integrally.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b with the contents related to the decoration of the second rendering surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second The main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second rendering surface 661b, and the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized integrally.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first action unit 600 and the third action unit 800 are in the effect waiting state, and the second action unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70(d) shows the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decoration rotating member 660 moves toward the left and right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. 59), the covering member 787 can be reversed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, the auxiliary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2, which are different on the left and right sides, are directed to the front side, so that it is possible to create a state in which there is no distinguishing power, as described above, as shown in FIG. In addition, different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the contents of "Pinch!?" Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 .

For example, when notifying that the lottery is lost, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 by performing control such that the state shown in FIG.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the presentation standby state. Above the second action unit 700, a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both written horizontally. easy to let In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the rendering standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first motion unit 600 has the first rendering surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them integrally. In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In this way, in this embodiment, the rendering surfaces 661a and 661b of the first action unit 600 are made integral with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decoration fixing member 670). Configure. As a result, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first action unit 600 and the second action unit 700 are in the effect waiting state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) are different in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the integral rotation of the third operation unit 800 being performed. On the other hand, even if the switching rotation motion is executed from any state, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same one union state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in arrangement of the first decorative member 870 . As a result, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the big hit by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol variation. In this case, the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 can prevent the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot will be announced.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), a game of whether or not a big win is possible. expectations can be maintained as well. Therefore, the player's attention to the third action unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is viewed alone and a case where the decoration is viewed integrally in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed in each of the action units 600-800 are designed as decorations that relate to each other between the action units 600-800 rather than being completed only by each action unit 600-800.

Whether or not the operation units 600 to 800 can be controlled is affected by their arrangement. That is, if the operation units 600 to 800 are driven at inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that member operations will collide and malfunction. controlled as

For example, the change to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 may be performed in any state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation. be.

The change of the first action unit 600 to the intermediate rendering state may be any state of the second action unit 700, any vertical arrangement of the third action unit 800, and no switching rotation action for the rotating motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 may be any state of the first operation unit 600, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation.

The change to the intermediate effect state of the second motion unit 700 can be done in any state of the first motion unit 600, in any vertical arrangement of the third motion unit 800, and as long as the rotation motion is not switching rotation motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation occurs, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that it is in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation is performed is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. be done.

As described above, the drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is not enabled at arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball once flows down toward the near side by the sorting device 300 and then flows down backward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by bending the path a plurality of times or forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a portion that flows down toward the near side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second prize winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described. Any shape is acceptable as long as it can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so that a large number of fine projections protrude from the plane so as to impart an irregular load to the colliding ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the sorting device 300, the case where it flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. not a thing For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left-right central portion of the specific prize winning opening 65a, and the balls may be formed so as to directly flow into the third flow passage forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, the balls can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the opening or does not pass through the opening.

In the first embodiment described above, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific prize winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensors SE<b>11 and SE<b>12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335 . Moreover, in this case, the order of the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the ball flows down in the horizontal direction, or immediately after the ball flows down in the front-rear direction (flows toward the front side). may be branched to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the above-described first embodiment, as features of the sorting device 300 alone, the channel directions and inclinations of the channel forming portions 334 to 336 have been described, but the features are not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the "sleep" that is performed on a daily basis.

Laying down means that the pachinko machine 10 is installed not in a vertical posture but in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) lying backward about 1 degree (4/5 rins). Compared to the description of the above sorting device 300 alone (state without rest), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-back direction The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is tilted to the rear side by 5 degrees from the horizontal. It is designed to be inclined, but considering the installation angle together, the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path inclined downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is less likely to be affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow down of the ball in the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 is the same, and the acceleration in the second flow path forming part 335 is slightly increased. become smaller. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the ball in the left-right direction, so that the player can easily see the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 . In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than the third flow path forming part 336. can pass between

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the aging of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the angle of inclination of each of the passage forming portions 334 and 336 is made smaller than the angle of rest (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the spheres in the passage forming portions 334 and 336 will change depending on the quality of the rest (angle setting). It is necessary to set the angle of inclination larger than the angle of the repositioning.

In addition, in the configuration in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the flow path There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. If you dare to grasp the degree of laziness, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured so that it is easy to visually recognize it.

On the other hand, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are provided around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "sleep" cannot be grasped from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 are arranged to surround, the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is arranged on the lower side so as to deteriorate the visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is made worse except for the normal player's line of sight (range of 0 to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sleep" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the balls flowing down the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or the same inclination may be used.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a linear flow path, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a stepwise curved channel shape may be used.

Further, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, Krun may be employed as each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, a case was described in which the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 was designed to be 0.3 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or longer). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is , the third flow path forming part 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the sphere flowing down.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the passage length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is ensured to ensure the flow time of the sphere, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, long ridges are formed in a direction intersecting the flowing direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the route to the slide displacement member 370, and protrude alternately, and the ridges are made to collide with the game ball. It may be configured to decelerate the ball by As a result, it is possible to secure the flow-down time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 are not formed with ridges, and the ridges are formed only in the third flow path forming part 336, so that the third flow path forming part 336 It can be constructed such that the spheres reach up to the point 336 quickly, while the spheres slowly flow down the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In addition, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the downward flow path of the balls, or they may be projected upward from the bottom at predetermined intervals. Any direction is fine.

In the case of projecting from the left and right direction, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusion normally goes to the partition plate portion 338 side instead of toward the detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the erroneous guidance of the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting upward from the bottom side, the protrusion itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

In addition, you may form a protrusion so that it can be projected and retracted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in the extended state, and to resume the downward flow of the ball in the retracted state.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which blindfold is provided by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be blinded by the decorative member. The cosmetic member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

Also, when blindfolded by a ball, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If so, a blindfold function can occur.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be arranged behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blinded, or the other general winning holes 63 may be blinded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 are linear and formed of flow passages capable of guiding spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur. may be configured.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the blinding effect is produced by the ball directed toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ejection path for ejecting balls that have entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side), The slide displacement member 370 may be blinded by the ejection path and the balls arranged in the ejection path.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path forming part 334 to the second flow path forming part 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path forming portion 335, The sphere may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the ball's own weight, or may be driven by a driving device so as to perform a constant movement from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or it may be driven in a predetermined pattern from the time the pachinko machine is powered on. You can control it like this.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming part 335 side. For example, when the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a exceeds the count (10 balls/round) (excessive winning), the balls are configured to flow to the second flow passage forming part 335 side. can be In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank) and a ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made to notice that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the side of the second flow passage forming part 335 . In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

In the case of displacing by the ball's own weight, the predetermined movement may be repeated each time the ball reaches, or different movements may be performed depending on the number of balls that reach. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, The balls may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. Also, the opposite is possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the ball flows down from the specific winning hole 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, the number of balls entered into the specific winning hole 65a is made to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and the balls after that are sent to the second It may be configured to discharge without passing through the flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the passage forming portions 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81, and the case where the ball is flowed to the near side near the lower end of the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 of the sorting device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or viewed from the front It may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player can obtain from the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to see whether the profit is large or small. You can easily see what you have earned.

Also, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in a front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the ball rolling on the third flow passage forming portion 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping. Also good. In this case, not only the ball entering the sorting device 300 but also the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the front flowing ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has passed can be made to enter the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the leading trailing ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds passes normally enters the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the trailing ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the trailing ball switches (downward) toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Hidden, it cannot be seen. In addition, since the chasing ball normally hits the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not hit the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it look as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the variable probability state are made the same to maintain the player's expectation. In such a game machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has collided with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 does not normally flow toward the detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 is configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured with a plurality of types (for example, Kroon and widening the path width to increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the ball), and the load due to collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 due to the difference in the speed and rotation of the ball It may be constructed so as to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed separately has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370 . That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 .

In the first embodiment described above, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a ball, but the operation timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the long guide hole 616, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide long hole 616 to form an outer phase of the gap, or by using a magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring to change the displacement resistance.

In the above-described first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 is formed in a shape that bends in the middle, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 . For example, the long guide hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the angle θ can be maintained while the rotating member 620 is rotating.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide long holes 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is shifted by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by coming into contact with the rotating member 620). The long guide hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the shape of the long guide hole 616 may be configured to be changeable.

In the above-described first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the first rendering surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and leftward. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, it may be configured so that the effect surface is directed to the front and oblique right side in a state arranged on the left side of the third pattern display device 81, or when arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third pattern display device 81 Alternatively, the performance surface may be directed diagonally forward (downward).

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the displacement, but it is not necessarily limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 rather than the direct-acting member functions favorably to secure the rotation angles of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the projecting decoration portion 652b.

For example, when a member that slides laterally is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the projecting decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that regardless of this favorable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and has decorations on three side surfaces that intersect at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second ornamental rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side face faces forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easy to see together with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decoration rotating member 660 can intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with the longitudinal component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above-described first embodiment, the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described so that the second action unit 700 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720 so as to generate an attractive force between the magnet and the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710 . is likely to occur in the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700 .

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 is maintained by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters from the rear end of the game area to the front side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be possible to project forward by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be passed forward from below, or the game area may be protruded forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 787 rotates in the opposite direction, so that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not aligned and visually recognized, thereby reducing the distinguishability. However, this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, instead of turning the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, they may rotate while turning toward the left and right outer sides. Moreover, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment described above, both the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 share the rotational angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834 is configured to rotate (reverse), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a structure in which a metal rod 832 that guides a rotating member 834 is grooved in a unicursal pattern and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member may vary depending on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched from the state in which the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integral rotation operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the driving direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, by detecting that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation can be changed. It may be determined that the operation has switched to the integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in places, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that produces viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of the oil damper, since the resistance continues to be generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect light. During the integral rotation operation, the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833 by arranging the linear motion member 833 on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle). When the 833 is arranged on the tip side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, it is possible to reflect the light LD1 by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. is.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means blinds the passed means>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path construction means to pass through, wherein the path construction means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the path construction means. Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position that overlaps at least a part of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passage means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path construction means is characterized. Gaming machine A1 to play.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of constructing a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls directed to a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 to make it difficult to recognize. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the decorative plate 302 makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431 at all times, it is possible to confirm the entry of the ball into the ball detection hole 431 and continue or stop the shooting of the game ball. There was a possibility that the player could feel dissatisfied with the game mode of playing. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the portion related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path construction means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to construct a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether the shooting operation of the game ball should be continued or stopped by confirming the flow of the first game ball. Relevant parts can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the downflow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a lottery pattern (for example, a starting hole), a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, and others through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second game ball that flows down the upstream side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the means to be passed. Material cost and design cost can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing other decorative members.

In the gaming machine A2, the path constructing means includes a longitudinal path formed with a longitudinal width that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. At least part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the game machine A3, the forward-backward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path construction means at a shooting interval set in the shooting device. A game machine A4 characterized in that a game ball is configured to hide at least part of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path forming means while maintaining the firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball as the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize even in normal times.

A gaming machine A5, wherein in the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-side component of the front-back direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the back-side component.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the back-and-forth direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed. is hidden behind the second game ball. That is, the blindfold effect can be improved.

A gaming machine A6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A5, the front side component is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the same blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the forward-backward direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. When the number of game balls is arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the path construction means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a back-and-forth direction path. A gaming machine A7, characterized by comprising a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows game balls to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game balls flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can use the means to be passed. On the other hand, the blindfold effect can be produced not only when the passed means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also when the line of sight shifts left and right and looks into the means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in a configuration in which one of the left and right sides is closed by the wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to construct a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path constructing means includes a first flow-down path through which game balls pass through the passing means in a first mode, and a second flow path through which game balls pass in a second mode. and a flow-down route of the first game ball, regardless of which flow-down route of the route configuration means, at least a part of which is covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be visually recognized A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flowing state of the game ball flowing down the path construction means regardless of whether or not the passed means has passed. , it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the path construction means.

Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the ball flows in a different direction, or a mode in which the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passed means is provided, the branching means comprises switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine A9 is characterized in that the path constructing means is composed of game balls whose flowing paths are divided by the branching means, and the game balls that have reached the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the game ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same route for a predetermined section, so that the game ball that reaches the switching means immediately afterward. Comprehension of the flow down of the game ball can be made more difficult than in the case of the flow mode corresponding to the flow path of . As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the path construction means includes a projecting part projecting toward the flowing game ball, and the projecting part acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the projecting portion can act on the branching of the game ball. durability can be improved.

In the game machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. and the amount of projection of the second projecting portion are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the influence of the second projecting portion on the game ball are determined according to the flow of the game ball. can be different. As a result, while using the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means appeals to the introduction to the passed means>
A path configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through, and the path configuring means is more likely than the passed means to pass. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion forming an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than the passing means, and configured to be capable of guiding a game ball to the passing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 so that it is difficult to recognize. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there are gaming machines in which the game ball falls off the decorative plate 302 or is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a game ball with good visibility that falls off the decorative plate 302 is configured to rather deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since part of the falling game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so the focus is on the game ball. There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied because it is likely to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the manner in which the game ball flows after attracting attention worthy of attention.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the means to be passed, the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball and It can be associated with the game ball passing through the means to be passed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass through the means to be passed.

In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined part, and the possibility of the player missing that the game ball is heading toward the means to be passed is reduced. be able to.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a lottery pattern (for example, a starting hole), a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, and others through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the side of the display device that is easy to catch the player's eye, the side of the winning opening, the side of the starting opening, the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to visually recognize, or the side of the specific ball entrance. The stage (mainly, the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where game balls temporarily stay) is a place where the probability of entering a ball is remarkably high, and it is directly connected to winning a big hit. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as the operation target, the effect operation button side, the range where the game ball that deviates from the entrance ball flowing down (the range where the player is frustrated and follows with his eyes) side, , the bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. In addition, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the path configuration means includes a second predetermined portion that makes a game ball that has entered the path configuration means less conspicuous than when the game ball entered the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is more conspicuous than the second predetermined portion. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being arranged on the conspicuous side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, before the game ball entering the path configuration means flows down the predetermined part, the attention force is lowered in the second predetermined part, so that the game ball flows down the predetermined part. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion comprises sections in which game balls flow at different speeds.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the effect of attracting the player's line of sight can be improved compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the game balls.

The game machine B3 is characterized in that the second flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is faster than the first flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the game ball entering the path forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the game ball is displaced at different speeds when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction at any predetermined location, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and the player's eyes can be diverted from other portions. .

It should be noted that the manner in which the displacement speed of the apparent game ball is varied is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in a front view may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component. The difference may be in the case of curvilinear or meandering displacement, or other differences.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B5, an introducing means configured to allow game balls to be introduced into the path configuring means is provided, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball which is highly likely to pass through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured so that the game ball on the front side of the path construction means flows down so as to avoid the line of sight directed to the passed means or the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path configuring means, and the line of sight that the game ball flowing down path is directed to the means to be passed. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the above, it is possible to ensure both the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the means to be passed.

It should be noted that the manner in which the game ball is flowed under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or the game ball may flow toward the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, the ball may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned final position and the position of the player's eyes. Good, or something else.

In the gaming machine B7, the path construction means includes acceptance state changing means configured to be capable of changing between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is A game machine B8, characterized in that, in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, a game ball that has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state can be guided to the side of the path forming means. .

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the game ball that flows down after reaching the receiving state changing means so as to be bridged can be prevented from blocking the line of sight directed to the means to be passed. can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with partition means arranged above the passage means in a front view and partitioning a game area, and the partition means is configured so that game balls can flow down left and right outside. Characteristic gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the means to be passed, so that the field of vision toward the means to be passed can be improved. can be easily secured.

In addition, as a mode of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes a flow-down surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entrance constituting means that allows a game ball to enter. Further, the dividing means may be a means having a fixed shape (appearance) or a means having a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received. The game machine B10 is characterized in that the portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide the game ball to the side of the receiving state changing means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, it is possible to configure such that game balls in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means are pushed into the receiving state changing means by the partitioning means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball slipping sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

For example, as the receiving state changing means, a special winning device having an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a lateral axis is assumed, and as the partitioning means, a first winning opening disposed above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed. . A game ball that reaches the special winning slot just before the opening/closing plate closes is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate. sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the turning tip of the opening/closing plate, when at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball skids. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will pass the front position of the means to be passed after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

When it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate so as to avoid the position of the means to be passed from the front view, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate is reduced. become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate after skidding, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B7 to B10, the game balls flowing down the path constructing means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the path constructing means are configured to flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B7 to B10, a game ball that may flow down the path configuration means and pass through the means to be passed, and the front side of the path configuration means By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the game balls flowing down near the path construction means whether the game balls are likely to enter the path construction means or difficult to enter.

A gaming machine B12 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, a gaming machine B12 is provided with light-emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined part is reflected by light, and it is possible to easily avoid the ball becoming difficult to see.

<Points for securing the length of the path to the V-door while saving space>
Path construction means configured to allow game balls to flow down; Passed means configured to allow game balls flowing down the path construction means to pass through; and a first state in which game balls can flow down to the passed means. a state switching means capable of switching between the first state and a second state different from the first state; The game machine C1 is characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball can flow down toward the passing means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distributing part 75 configured to be movable left and right is arranged in a flow-down path of a game ball that enters the second prize-winning hole 12. There is a game machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction of (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the distribution unit 75 is essential to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and the ball being caught by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the behavior of the segment 75 is felt as distrust, and the game cannot be continued without anxiety.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second big winning hole 12 to a position near the left and right central part of the game area (near the first big winning hole 10), from the second big winning hole 12 It is possible to secure a long channel length up to the distribution section 75 . As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the game ball flowing-down path over a wide range from the second big winning hole 12 to the first big winning hole 10, and the game area can be freely designed within this range. degree is limited. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73 .

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the path construction means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the path construction means in the front view is shortened and the space is saved, the path construction means does not enter the path construction means. It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the game ball hit passes through the means to be passed.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball enters the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path forming means. False wins can be avoided without operating for a short period of time an opening/closing device for switching whether or not a ball can enter a constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, there may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path for causing the game ball to flow down along the flow-down path having a forward-backward direction component may be provided.

In the game machine C1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and among the predetermined flow-down paths, the flow-down path toward the front side is more likely to flow down than the flow-down path toward the back side. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured so that the acceleration of the is increased.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down routes, and among the predetermined flow-down routes, the flow-down route toward the front side is compared to the flow-down route that maintains the front-back position and flows down. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is constructed so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing on the near side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are arranged in front of the means to be passed when viewed from a predetermined direction. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is arranged in the front position, visibility in the vicinity of the means to be passed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

According to the game machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the rear side rather than the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, when the ball entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to construct a state in which the game ball is always placed in one of the front positions, so that the passing means is invisible. It becomes possible.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the path configuring means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the route constructing means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the path can be improved, and compared to the folded path that is folded back at 180 degrees, the Possibility of clogging of balls or the like can be reduced.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, game machine C7 is characterized in that the path construction means comprises a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the left-right width of the route forming means can be suppressed, so that the pair of left-right symmetrical route forming means can be configured with a suppressed left-right width. can be done.

In any one of game machines C1 to C7, game machine C8 is characterized in that said passed means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of said path constructing means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passing means and the ball receiving part of the path forming means in the field of vision of the player viewed from the front side. .

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the path configuring means includes first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive game balls. and a second receiving means configured to change the profit obtained by the player depending on the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

It should be noted that the manner of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which game balls are accepted only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are accepted by being limited to the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the first receiving means and then second receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be received in the means may be used. Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different, or a mode in which ball entry positions are different.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit that the player can obtain depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A game machine C10 characterized in that it occurs depending on whether a game ball is received in both of the.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, it is possible for the player to easily launch the game ball in a predetermined shooting mode by setting the size of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payout of the prize ball, winning of the jackpot, change of the game state after the jackpot, The game state may be changed to a normal state (falling down, etc.).

A gaming machine C11 in the gaming machine C9 or C10, wherein the path forming means is bilaterally symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the game machines C9 to C11, the path configuring means comprises a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the receiving mode changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state changing mode.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C9 to C11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that the player's skill in shooting the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C12, the mode of state change of said acceptance state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects of the game machine C12, even when the game ball is shot in a fixed shooting mode, the receiving mode of the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means can be changed. As a result, it is possible to adjust the profit that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flowing direction of the sphere>
a path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state capable of introducing the game ball into the path configuring means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path configuration means, and a state switching means configured such that the direction of displacement caused by the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. The gaming machine XA1 is characterized by being configured along the direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the game machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flowing direction of the game ball, the state can be changed while the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence to change the rolling mode of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on top of it, thereby rolling and rotating the game ball. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides so as to skim the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the flow of the game ball.

Due to the effect on the flow of the game ball, the flow of the ball on the state switching means can be changed variously during the opening and closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without worrying about it.

Also, the positional relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged to rub against the side of the game ball, or may be arranged to collide against the game ball in the flowing direction.

In the state switching means displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. can be regulated with less resistance.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
A path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced to the passed means; a state switching means configured to be able to change between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means and a non-introduction state, wherein the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to guide a game ball in the second direction in the non-introduction state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it protrudes forward, but when it retracts to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. I will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retreating to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) that guides the downflow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state. Since members can be eliminated, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of game balls in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set laterally with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is started. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guiding portion that causes the guiding action of the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged in a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be arranged in a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured such that it can be switched to a state of close proximity or easy contact.

When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, it is designed not only to provide guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also to consider the influence on the game ball during the state switching operation. preferably.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface inclined to the flowing direction (plane, curved surface, etc.) is used rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the flowing direction. ), it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Separation, reversal, combination, and rotation are a series of actions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable such that the visually recognized surface is changed, the displacement means comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined form of displacement, the first displacement A game machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 can rotate multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface seen by the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable along with the displacement, it is possible to maintain the attention to the displacement means.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by relatively displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved toward and away from each other with reference to a collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged; A gaming machine D2 characterized by comprising at least a second displacement member in which a second displacement member rotates with respect to the collecting portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, if only the first displacement is used as the displacement with respect to the gathering portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the end portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest is likely to be reduced. The 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member may appear to stop and the performance effect may be lowered, but by mixing the 2nd displacement, it is possible to generate displacement in the rotation direction even at the terminal end. Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. can let

In any one of game machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by adsorption or adhesion, and the load associated with the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 characterized by acting in a direction that limits displacement of a member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixing , the displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

For example, in the case of transmission of driving force by a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement occurs, but if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Also, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the side viewed by the player, the strength of the fixation on the side viewed by the player can be set.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united to make it easier to see as one, and the other surface is loosely united to make it easier to see in a state where relative displacement is easy to occur. can be done.

Further, for example, by configuring the degree of adsorption of the first displacement member and the degree of attraction of the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to constitute a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the degree of fixation of the second displacement member differ. can.

In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption|suction is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or may utilize the attractive force between a magnet and a metal portion. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed so as to use fixing screws, screws, or the like, for example, as the metal portion to be attracted to the magnet.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in the first displacement mode and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, wherein the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since it is configured as a displacement mode to which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention to the displacing means at the time of retraction, so that it is possible to relatively increase the attention to the displacing means displaced at the performance position.

In the conventional machine, since the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after the performance position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) is projected, it is necessary to retreat to the retracted position (outside the liquid crystal display area). It had to rotate multiple times again in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to be drawn to the member retreating from the rendering position, which may be viewed as a problem.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, across a plurality of planes, or three-dimensional.

In the game machine D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means comprises release means configured to release the load transmission when the motion resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed depending on the magnitude of the movement resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D1 to D6, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is provided with the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The game machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visually recognized surface is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. can be changed by

For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. can be changed with

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the disposition of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Characterized game machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible. can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement means can be displaced while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement/reduction is performed after displacing from the effect position toward the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement from the performance position to the retracted position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to the case of displacing in a displacement mode including enlargement and reduction from the start of the displacement. .

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting two or more numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9 to play.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D7, it is possible to reduce the number of detection means. Various modes are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to the change in the motion mode when the motion mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to construct a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player side, the first displacement member is configured to be reversible between the orientation of the surface and the orientation of the surface on the other side. While the displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, when the other side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member faces the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the .

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D9, the reversal operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player side. It is possible to keep the player's expectation high for the occurrence of .

<Points for changing easily visible surfaces by arranging displacing means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
Displacement means comprising a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means has a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, and the A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversible reversing operation unit 71 and is configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visually recognized surface (for example, , see JP-A-2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the viewed surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the route of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening is provided for opening the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the inner side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the rear side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening. .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the central side of the open portion, the displacement means can be visually recognized on the front side, and the displacement means can be seen on the edge side of the open portion. The movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacing means when arranged can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are configured to be difficult to visually recognize when the surfaces are visible.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, thereby displacing the displacement means. To allow a player who visually recognizes different characters and figures to be visually recognized, and to make it difficult to visually recognize a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are not intended to be visually recognized. , it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacing means from becoming unsightly.

For example, in the first set, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second set, the lottery result is displayed. is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big win is expressed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of a big win by the displacement means can be maintained. Also, it is possible to continue visually recognizing the display of the expectation of the big win.

In addition, the aspect which comprises hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be structured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

In the game machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is performed so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first visible surface displayed to the player side during the operation (before confirmation) of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface and the second set of visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

It should be noted that there is no limitation on the aspect configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be detachable from each other. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the brightness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is visible, and the other is turned toward the back so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in such a state that some of them and other parts can be visually recognized at the same time, but are visually recognized in a displaced arrangement.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized by comprising an opening for opening the displacement means to be visible, and wherein the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening. Gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and to improve the attention to the switching action.

In the game machine E5 or E6, one of the part of the first visible face and the other part faces the front side and the other faces the side different from the front side during the switching operation. Gaming machine E7 to play.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, by making a part of the first visible surface visible during operation and making the whole invisible, the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible faces can be made difficult to perceive.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E7, a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least part of a line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be capable of blocking at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means, together with the second displacement means, A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible side visible.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface by the second displacement means to make it difficult to see, the effect position of the displacement means can be changed. Design freedom can be improved.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface in accordance with the displacement. A gaming machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change the easily visible surface without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

A game machine E10 characterized in that, in the game machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the attitude of the displacement means. can.

In the game machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means is arranged in the second state. is arranged apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of the game machine E9 or E10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means and visually recognized integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separated and visually recognized are available. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacing means gives to the player.

In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means whose arrangement is fixed, or movable means.

In the game machine E11, the auxiliary means can switch between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there is a variation in the visible mode with respect to the number of members. can be increased.

<Points where the ratio of the amount of displacement of the displacing means and the amount of displacement of the arranging means at the same point in time differs between sections>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, disposing means for disposing the first portion on the displacing means, and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means, the supporting means A game machine F1, characterized in that it is configured to be able to control the arrangement of said second portion with reference to said first portion during displacement of said displacement means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. and a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and the rotation accessory 211 can be rotated independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2016-116782 (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted and displaced, there is a possibility that the mechanism will malfunction. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational movement of the rotational accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at least at two points, and the two support points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the supporting means can control the placement of the second portion with respect to the first portion, the disposing means can be displaced while the displacing means is being displaced while stably supporting the disposing means. can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means so as to restrict its displacement, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means displaces the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range A game machine F2 characterized in that the direction is different from the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the disposing means can be varied, Since it is configured to allow a change in the direction of displacement of the second portion, even if the direction of displacement of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the support means comprises a restricting portion for restricting the displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be restricted at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the large displacement side to the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled or a mode in which the second portion is pushed may be used.

It should be noted that the mode of the restricting section is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be configured to switch the direction of displacement of the second portion.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the terminal end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means in the first section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to form a section in which the amount of relative displacement of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means becomes small at the mid-displacement position of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacing means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the arranging means can be easily visually recognized as an integral unit. Easy position can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion is variable.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second part of the disposing means on the side of the support means can be changed, it is possible to construct an action presentation in which the displacement speed of the disposing means is made variable by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the end of displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and it is possible to easily stop the arrangement means early at the end of the displacement.

Note that the technique for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. It is also possible to restrict the displacement of the second portion by designing a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion while the first portion is stationary.

Further, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the method of increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion may be employed. For example, a magnetic force or the like may be applied at the end of the displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or an urging force such as a coil spring may be used to improve the displacement resistance. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to provide a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and a displacement locus of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of the displacement. A game machine F7 characterized in that the displacement trajectory of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion allows the first portion to stop. 2 can reduce the return displacement (bounce).

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, a supported means displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means corresponds to a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F7, a complicated performance can be executed by the supported means displaced together with the arrangement means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arranging means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arranging means on a predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced. , a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change, or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

In the game machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion includes a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion. Amusement machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is being displaced, the amount of relative displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the arrangement of the second portion is maintained.

In the game machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the disposing means comprises attitude changing means for changing the attitude so as to switch the side facing the player side between the first side and the second side according to the displacement of the disposing means. A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured so that the first face or the second face faces the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first or second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player side, so that the second portion reaches the end of the displacement. Since the player can grasp the arrival, it is possible to comprehend the final stage of the performance action by the displacement means.

A gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12 and F1 to F11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12 and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12 and F1 to F11, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that a rotating base provided at the tip of a base arm can rotate multiple times (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782).
However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of maintaining attention to the displacement means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 is provided with displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member. and a member, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined mode of displacement.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner is performed by approaching and separating from a gathering portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged as a reference. and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate with respect to the collective portion.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to maintain the attention to the displacement means.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. .
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, , the decoration visually recognized by the player can be markedly different.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (a part of the area configuration means)
65b Open/close plate (introduction means, acceptance state change means, part of avoidance means)
86 center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (section means, part of avoidance means)
163b ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-to-rear projection (part of first flow path, part of projection, second projection, part of state switching means)
318 Left and right inner projecting portion (part of branching means, part of projecting portion, first projecting portion, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 upper member (a part of the route configuring means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route configuration means)
334 First flow path configuration part (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path parts)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left-right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration part (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path part)
351 light emitting means 370 slide displacement member (part of branching means, part of switching means, part of state switching means)
380 lower member (a part of the route configuring means)
600 first operating unit (displacement means)
616 guide slot (support means)
616a straight part (part of support means, first range, limiting part)
616b curved portion (part of support means, second range, limiting portion)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 cylindrical part (first part)
652 front rotating member (supported means)
652b overhang decorative part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (posture changing means)
661a First rendering surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second rendering surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 second operating unit (displacement means)
787a1 First major decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second major decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787b2 Second minor decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 third operating unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 detection sensor (detection means)
823b outer light emitting part (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of assembly)
866 torque limiter (release means)
870 first decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covering part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covering part (part of visible surface)
C1 collar (part of placement means, second part)
C2 dish-shaped lid portion (part of disposing means, second portion)
P1 sphere (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Probability variation detection sensor (part of means to be passed)
SE12 normal detection sensor (a part of means to be passed)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined mode of displacement,
The first displacement member is configured to be displaceable in such a manner that a surface visible in a predetermined region when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between a first surface and a second surface ,
the displacement in the predetermined mode and the change in the visible surface are configured to be caused by a driving force from the same driving means;
The change in the visible surface is caused by displacement of the first displacement member accompanying displacement of the second displacement member by the driving means ,
In the game machine, when the driving means is set to a predetermined driving state, the second displacement member is displaced, the first displacement member is displaced, and the visible surface is changed, the visible surface is changed. configured to maintain the visible surface when the predetermined driving state is continued after the surface is changed;
A period during which the predetermined driving state is continued may be a first period, and a period during which the predetermined driving state is continued may be a second period shorter than the first period. game machine.

Images